Está en la página 1de 324

ALS

Access Link Series


PDH radio family

User manual

MN.00183.E - 003
Volume 1/1

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.


Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

Contents

Section 1.
USER GUIDE

11

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..............................................................................11

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .........................................12


2.1

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ....................................................................12


2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................12
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................12

2.2

SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................13

2.3

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical & electronic equipment) ....15

2.4

INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................15

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................16


3.1

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................16

3.2

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................16

3.3

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................16

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION

ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................19
4.1

19

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS...................................................................................19

SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................21


5.1

RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................21

5.2

RECOMMENDATION ..........................................................................................21

5.3

APPLICATION ...................................................................................................21

5.4

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................22

5.1.1 General .................................................................................................21

5.4.1 Modular IDU...........................................................................................22


5.4.2 Compact IDU unit ...................................................................................23
5.4.3 Modular IDU Plus ....................................................................................23
5.4.4 IDU Plus Compact Unit (5.4.4)..................................................................24
5.4.5 ODU......................................................................................................24
5.5

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM......................................................................................25

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

5.5.1 Hardware platform ..................................................................................25


5.5.2 Management ports ..................................................................................25
5.5.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................25
6

EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................28


6.1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................28

6.2

SERVICE CHANNELS .........................................................................................28

6.3

TRANSMISSION CAPACITY .................................................................................29

6.4

POWER SUPPLY, CONSUMPTION AND MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS ...................31

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT ...............................................................40


7.1

GENERAL.........................................................................................................40

7.2

TRIBUTARY INTERFACE .....................................................................................40


7.2.1 2 Mbit/s interface....................................................................................40
7.2.2 34 Mbit/s interface ..................................................................................41
7.2.3 Ethernet interface ...................................................................................41

7.3

STM-1 INTERFACE ............................................................................................41


7.3.1 Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface ................................................42

7.4

SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE...........................................................................43


7.4.1 2 Mbit/s wayside interface........................................................................43
7.4.2 64 kbit/s codirectional interface ..............................................................43
7.4.3 64 kbit/s contradirectional interface V.11 .................................................44
7.4.4 Analogue interface ..................................................................................44
7.4.5 9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data .................................44
7.4.6 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data .....................................44
7.4.7 Alarm interface.......................................................................................44
7.4.8 Network Management Interface ................................................................45

7.5

MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR .............................................................................46

7.6

CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................46

7.7

AVAILABLE LOOPS ............................................................................................46

DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES ................47


8.1

1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU VERSION ......................................................................47


8.1.1 LIM .......................................................................................................47
8.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................47
8.1.3 RIM.......................................................................................................50
8.1.3.1

QAM modulator ........................................................................50

8.1.3.2

QAM demodulator.....................................................................50

8.1.3.3

Power supply ...........................................................................50

8.1.3.4

Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................50

8.1.4 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................51


8.1.4.1

8.2

Service signals.........................................................................51

8.1.4.2

Equipment software..................................................................51

8.1.4.3

Supervision ports .....................................................................52

IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................52


8.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................52
8.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................52
8.2.3 IDU loop ................................................................................................53

DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU WITH lim ETHERNET (2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES +


ETHERNET TRAFFIC) ...............................................................................................63
9.1

1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU ....................................................................................63

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

9.1.1 LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries..............................................................63


9.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................63
9.1.3 LIM Ethernet: Ethernet traffic ...................................................................66
9.1.3.1

2 Mbit/s tributaries ...................................................................66

9.1.3.2

Electrical Ethernet interface .......................................................67

9.1.3.3

Front panel LEDs ......................................................................67

9.1.3.4

Switch function ........................................................................67

9.1.3.5

Ethernet Full Duplex function .....................................................68

9.1.3.6

Link Loss Forwarding ................................................................68

9.1.3.7

MDI/MDIX crossover ...............................................................68

9.1.3.8

VLAN functionality ....................................................................69

9.1.3.9

Switch organized by port ...........................................................69

9.1.3.10

Switch organized by VLAN ID .....................................................69

9.1.3.11

Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p........................................70

9.1.3.12

Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IPV4 ToS (DSCP) ........................71

9.1.4 RIM.......................................................................................................71
9.1.4.1

QAM modulator ........................................................................71

9.1.4.2

QAM demodulator.....................................................................71

9.1.4.3

Power supply ...........................................................................71

9.1.4.4

Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................72

9.1.5 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................72


9.1.5.1

Service signals.........................................................................72

9.1.6 Equipment software ................................................................................72


9.1.6.1
9.2

Supervision ports .....................................................................73

IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................74


9.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................74
9.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................74
9.2.3 IDU loop ................................................................................................74

10 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES ..................81


10.1

IDU COMPACT 1+0/1+1 VERSION ......................................................................81

11 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES AND


FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ..........................................................................................82
11.1

VERSION IDU COMPACT ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 .......................................................82

12 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU PLUS FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES HIERARCHIC


AND NOT HIERARCHIC ............................................................................................83
12.1

GENERAL.........................................................................................................83

12.2

COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU .......................................................................83

12.3

COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU .......................................................................84

12.4

1RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................84

12.5

2RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................85

12.6

2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE .........................................................................85

12.7

MATRIX STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU) ...................................................................85

12.8

DROP-INSERT (2RU) .........................................................................................85

12.9

NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)......................................................................................87


12.9.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodes ....................................................................87
12.9.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes.....................................................................88

12.10 DYNAMIC MODULATION ....................................................................................90


12.10.1Capacity reduction .................................................................................90
12.10.2Setting with SCT/LCT .............................................................................91
12.11 LIM.................................................................................................................91

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

12.12 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION......................................................................................91


12.13 RIM ................................................................................................................93
12.13.1QAM modulator .....................................................................................94
12.13.2QAM demodulator ..................................................................................94
12.13.3Power supply.........................................................................................94
12.13.4Telemetry IDU/ODU ...............................................................................94
12.14 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER..................................................................................94
12.14.1Service signals ......................................................................................95
12.14.2Equipment software ...............................................................................95
12.14.3Supervision ports ...................................................................................96
12.15 IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................96
12.15.1Tributary loop........................................................................................96
12.15.2Baseband unit loop ................................................................................96
12.15.3IDU loop ...............................................................................................97
12.16 EXPANSION 53E1 .............................................................................................97
12.17 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER .............................................................................97
12.18 PROCESSOR 53E1.............................................................................................97
13 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT PLUS FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES AND ETHERNET
TRAFFIC ................................................................................................................103
13.1

IDU COMPACT PLUS ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 VERSION ............................................. 103

14 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR E/W REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT ...104
14.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 104

14.2

COMPOSITION ............................................................................................... 104

14.3

IDU CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................... 105


14.3.1 Management of tributaries ..................................................................... 105
14.3.2 Capacity .............................................................................................. 105
14.3.3 E1 switching criteria .............................................................................. 105

14.4

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.................................................................................... 105


14.4.1 Matrix ................................................................................................. 106
14.4.2 Processor............................................................................................. 106
14.4.3 RIM..................................................................................................... 109
14.4.3.1

QAM modulator ...................................................................... 109

14.4.3.2

QAM demodulator................................................................... 109

14.4.3.3

Power supply ......................................................................... 109

14.4.3.4

Telemetry IDU/ODU................................................................ 109

14.4.4 CONTROLLER ....................................................................................... 110


14.4.4.1

14.5

Service signals....................................................................... 110

14.4.4.2

Equipment software................................................................ 110

14.4.4.3

Supervision ports ................................................................... 111

IDU LOOPS .................................................................................................... 111


14.5.1 Tributary loop....................................................................................... 111
14.5.2 Baseband unit loop ............................................................................... 111
14.5.3 IDU loop .............................................................................................. 112

15 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT ...........................................................116


15.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 116

15.2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ............................................................................. 116

16 OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION...............................................................................118


16.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 118

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

16.2

TRANSMIT SECTION........................................................................................ 118

16.3

RECEIVE SECTION .......................................................................................... 119

16.4

CABLE INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 119

16.5

ATPC OPERATION ........................................................................................... 119

16.6

1+1 Tx SYSTEM............................................................................................. 119

16.7

POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 120

17 24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089 ...............................................................126


17.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 126

17.2

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 126

17.3

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................... 126

Section 3.
INSTALLATION

131

18 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC


COMPATIBILITY.....................................................................................................131
18.1

GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION........................ 131

18.2

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 132

18.3

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................ 132


18.3.1 IDU installation..................................................................................... 132
18.3.2 1RU IDU installation .............................................................................. 132
18.3.3 2RU IDU installation .............................................................................. 132

18.4

ELECTRICAL WIRING....................................................................................... 132

18.5

CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS .............................................................. 134

18.6

GROUNDING CONNECTION .............................................................................. 134

19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS ......................................................................135


19.1

CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR VERSION .................................. 135

19.2

MODULAR VERSION CONNECTORS.................................................................... 136

20 IDU COMPACT USER CONNECTIONS .......................................................................140


20.1

CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 COMPACT VERSION................................... 140

21 MODULAR IDU PLUS USER CONNECTIONS .............................................................144


21.1

CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU PLUS VERSION .................... 144

22 IDU COMPACT PLUS USER CONNECTIONS ..............................................................151


22.1

CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU COMPACT PLUS VERSION............................. 151

23 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........157
23.1

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 157

23.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 158

23.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 158

23.4

GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 160

24 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...........174


24.1

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 174

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

24.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 174

24.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 175

24.4

GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 177

25 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .........188
25.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 188

25.2

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 188

25.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 189

25.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 189


25.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna ................ 189
25.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 190
25.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 191

25.5

ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 191

25.6

COMPATIBILITY.............................................................................................. 191

25.7

GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 192

26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA


(KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................208
26.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 208

26.2

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 208

26.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 209

26.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 209

26.5

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 210


26.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 210
26.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 210
26.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 210
26.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 210
26.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 210
26.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 211
26.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 211

26.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 211


26.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 211
26.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 212

27 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA...223
27.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 223

27.2

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 223

27.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 223

27.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 224

27.5

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 224


27.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 224
27.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 225
27.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 225
27.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 225
27.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 225
27.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 225
27.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 225

27.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 226


27.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 226
27.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 226

28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

(KIT V32323).........................................................................................................237
28.1

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 237

28.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 237

28.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 237

Section 4.
LINE-UP

245

29 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................245


29.1

LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 245


29.1.1 Equipment configuration ........................................................................ 245
29.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 246
29.1.3 Network element configuration ............................................................... 246
29.1.4 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 247

30 LINEUP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 Mbit/s ....................................................................249


30.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 249

30.2

LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN


PER PORT ...................................................................................................... 249

30.3

LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN


PER PORT ...................................................................................................... 254

30.4

3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................ 257

30.5

3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC ........................ 258

30.6

3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC .... 260

30.7

3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT ............................ 261

31 LINEUP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT .......................264


31.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 264

31.2

BASEBAND CONFIGURATION............................................................................ 264

31.3

EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 265

31.4

EAST OR WEST PRESETTING ............................................................................ 266

31.5

TRIBUTARY ENABLING .................................................................................... 267

31.6

ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION ........................................................ 268

31.7

PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION .............................................................. 269

31.8

PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH) ............................................................ 269

31.9

PASSTHROUGH E1 CONNECTION .................................................................... 270

32 LINE-UP OF THE LINK WITH NODAL IDU ...............................................................271


32.1

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 271

32.2

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 271

32.3

TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 272

32.4

Configuration of the Cross-connection matrix ..................................................... 272


32.4.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection.......................................................... 273
32.4.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection ..................................................... 275

33 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE


CONNECTION .........................................................................................................277
33.1

PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 277

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 5.
MAINTENANCE

289

34 PERIODICAL CHECKS .............................................................................................289


34.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 289

34.2

CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT .......................................................................... 289

35 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................290
35.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 290

35.2

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................... 290


35.2.1 Loop facilities ....................................................................................... 290
35.2.2 Alarm messages processing.................................................................... 291

36 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER


MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS. ..........................292
36.1

SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 292

36.2

PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 292
36.2.1 General equipment configuration............................................................. 292
36.2.2 Addresses and routing table ................................................................... 293
36.2.3 Remote Element Table........................................................................... 294

37 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING


THE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................295
37.1

SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 295

37.2

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD ............................................................................... 295

37.3

CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD .......................................................................... 295

Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

297

38 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................297


38.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 297

Section 7.
COMPOSITION

299

39 COMPOSITION OF MODULAR IDU...........................................................................299


39.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 299

39.2

IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 299

39.3

COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT................................................................ 300

40 COMPOSITION OF COMPACT IDU ...........................................................................303

40.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 303

40.2

ALC IDU PART NUMBER ................................................................................... 303

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

41 COMPOSITION OF IDU COMPACT PLUS (ALC PLUS) ...............................................304


41.1

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 304

41.2

PART NUMBER OF IDU..................................................................................... 304

42 COMPOSITION OF IDU PLUS ..................................................................................305


42.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 305

42.2

IDU PLUS PART NUMBER ................................................................................. 305

42.3

COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS ...................................................................... 305


42.3.1 1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal......................................................................... 306
42.3.2 1+1 1RU 24E1 Terminal......................................................................... 306
42.3.3 1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal ......................................................................... 307
42.3.4 1+1 terminal 2RU 53E1 ......................................................................... 307
42.3.5 2RU 32E1 drop/insert ............................................................................ 308
42.3.6 Nodal 2RU STM1 E1 .............................................................................. 308

43 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................309


43.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 309

Section 8.
LISTS AND SERVICES

313

44 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................313


45 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................319
46 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................321

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

10

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 1.
USER GUIDE

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products:


-

digital radio relay system

ALS4

digital radio relay system

ALS7

digital radio relay system

ALS8

digital radio relay system

ALS11

digital radio relay system

ALS13

digital radio relay system

ALS15

digital radio relay system

ALS18

digital radio relay system

ALS23

digital radio relay system

ALS25

digital radio relay system

ALS28

digital radio relay system

ALS32

digital radio relay system

ALS38

complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) and therefore is
marked CE.
The following standards have been applied:
-

EN 60950-1: 2006 Safety of information technology equipment.

EN 301 4894 V.1.3.1 (20028): Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific conditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services

ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (200212): Fixed Radio Systems; Pointto point equipment and antennas;
generic harmonized standard for pointtopoint digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the
essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

11

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY


RULES

2.1

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.

2.1.1

Artificial respiration

It is important to start mouth respiration at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth respiration method is described in the Tab.1.

2.1.2

Treatment of burns

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).

Warning

12

Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

Apply dry gauze on the burns

Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration


Step

Description

Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.).

Figure

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patients head and one under his neck.
2

Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far


as possible.

Shift the hand from the patients neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
3

While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open

With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities

2.2

While performing these operations observe if the patients


chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patients nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of


twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.

SAFETY RULES

When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

13

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous
for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.

Fig.4 - Laser indication

14

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

2.3

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical &


electronic equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

2.4

INTERNAL BATTERY

Inside the equipment, in IDU unit, there is a lithium battery.


CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries
according to law.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

15

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

3.1

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual consists in providing the user with information which permit to operate and
maintain the AL radio family.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.

3.2

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:

a basic understanding of microwave transmission

installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.

3.3

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.

Section 1 User Guide


It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.

Section 2 Description and specifications


It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole
equipment and units it consists of.
List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.

Section 3 Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

16

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 4 LineUp
Lineup procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.

Section 5 Maintenance
The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the
faulty unit and to reestablish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.

Section 6 Programming and supervision


The AL radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future.
This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 7 Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.

Section 8 Lists and assistance


This section contains the lists of figures and tables and the assistance service information.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

17

18

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION

ABBREVIATION LIST

4.1

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

AF

Assured Forwarding

AL

Access Link

ALS

Access LInk Series

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

ATPC

Automaric Transmit Power Control

BB

Baseband

BBER

Background Block Error Radio

BER

Bit Error Rate

DSCP

Differentiated Service Code Point

DSP

Digital Signal Processing

E1

2 Mbit/s

EMC/EMI

Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference

EOC

Embedded Overhead Channel

ERC

European Radiocommunication Committee

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

FEC

Forward Error Corrector

FEM

Fast Ethernet Module

HDLC

High Level Data Link Control

IDU

Indoor Unit

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

19

20

IF

Intermediate Frequency

IpToS

Type of Service IP

LAN

Local Area Network

LAPS

Link Access Procedure SDH

LCT

Local Craft Terminal

LIM

Line Interface Module

LLF

Link Loss Forwarding

LOF

Loss Of Frame

LOS

Loss Of Signal

MAC

Media Access Control

MDI

Medium Dependent Interface

MDIX

Medium Dependent Interface Crossover

MIB

Management Information Base

MMIC

Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit

MTBF

Mean Time Between Failure

NE

Network Element

ODU

Outdoor Unit

OSI

Open System Interconnection

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PPI

Plesiochronous Physical Interface

PPP

Point to Point Protocol

PTOS

Priority Type Of Service

RIM

Radio Interface Module

SCT

Subnetwork Craft Terminal

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TOS

Type Of Service

VID

Virtual LAN Identifier

VLAN

Virtual LAN

WFQ

Wait Fair Queue

Wayside Traffic

Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

SYSTEM PRESENTATION

5.1

RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW

5.1.1

General

Access Link Series PDH (ALS) is the name of the new PDH radio family designed by SIAE for low/medium
capacity transmission in the overall frequency bands from 4 GHz up to 38 GHz.
Different versions offer a wide range of transmission capacity using programmable 4QAM/16QAM modulation or 32QAM modulation.
Reduced cost, high reliability, compact size, light weight, fully programmability are the most outstanding
performances of these equipment.

5.2

RECOMMENDATION

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 4894 for EMC

EN 302 217 for all frequency bands

ITUR recommendations for all frequency bands

EN 300 1322 characteristics for power supply

EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)

EN 60950 for safety

5.3

APPLICATION

Equipment main applications are:

Radio links inside GSM cells of mobile radio networks

Radio links for voice and data transmission

LAN Ethernet extension

Spur routes for high capacity radio systems

Emergency links.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

21

5.4

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The ALS PDH equipment consists of two separate units available in different versions:

indoor unit called IDU for rack or 19 structure mounting that interfaces the input/output tributaries
and supervises the full equipment

outdoor unit called ODU for pole or wall mounting where the circuit forming the RF head take place.

The two units are interconnected via coaxial cable. Following figures show different ODU units and most
representative IDU units:

Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU, pole mounting and integrated antenna

Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity

Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports

Fig.9 - 1+1 Compact IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity and 3x10/100BaseT ports

Fig.10 - 1+1 Modular IDU Plus, up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity

Fig.11 - 1+1 Modular IDU Plus, up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports

Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus, Nodal with matrix and up to 8x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity

Fig.13 - 1+1 Compact IDU Plus, up to 32x2 Mbit/s capacity and 3x10/100BaseT capacity

IDU units are available in the following versions:

Modular IDU

Compact IDU

Modular IDU PLUS

Compact IDU PLUS.

5.4.1

Modular IDU

The Modular IDU is madeup in the following versions:

1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s

1+0/1+1, 2 unit high, capacity 32x2 Mbit/s

1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 34/2x34 Mbit/s

1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 4x2 Mbit/s + 3x10/100BaseT

1+0/1+1, 1unit high, capacity 16x2 Mbit/s + 4x10/100BaseT (with 32 Mbit/s max capacity).

The IDU consists of LIM, CONTROLLER, RIM modules, plugin inserted into a wired shelf.
In the 1+0 compact version LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM functions are integrated in a single module. Following
functionality description covers both 1+0 compact and 1+0/1+1 standard versions.
The LIM interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit
extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the demodulator). In
addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator.
Moreover the module duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive
side in the 1+1 version.
The RIM contains:

22

the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM in alternative;

the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU;

the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

The Controller performs the following:

interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given
in the system technical specification)

contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment functionality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU

interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports

receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

5.4.2

Compact IDU unit

The Compact IDU unit is available in the following versions:

1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8xE1

1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8/16xE1

1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8xE1

1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8/16xE1

1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8xE1 + 3ETH

1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8xE1 + 3ETH

1 unit, 1+1, 16xE1 + 3ETH.

The Ethernet module V12252 can be housed inside the IDU, as option, for the Ethernet traffic. The compact
IDUs are made by a single card plugged into a cabled rack.
The line interfaces contain the connections of the tributaries and, by means of processes of multiplexing/
demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/
demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the
radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE
management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to
the relay contacts.

5.4.3

Modular IDU Plus

The Modular IDU Plus is made up of the following versions:

terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32xE1 capacity, 1 unit high

terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32/42/53xE1 capacity, 2 unit high

terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/24xE1 + 4x10/100BaseT, 1 unit high

drop-insert 1+0, 1+1, 4x(1+0), up to 4x53xE1 capacity, that is passthrough up to 212xE1 streams
plus drop-insert up to 32xE1 or up to 53xE1 or up to 79xE1 with STM1+16xE1 interface, equipped
with matrix into 2 units

nodal, up to 3xModular IDU Plus can be joined in a mode giving full switching capabilities to all the
E1 streams coming from max 12 directions. Any direction can contain max 53xE1.

1 unit Modular IDU Plus consists of LIM 32E1, Eq. Controller, RIM plug-in inserted into a wired shelf.
2 unit Modular IDU Plus consists of Eq. Controller modules, LIM 32E1 or Matrix with 32E1, or Matrix with
STM1 and 16E1, one Processor for two ODU.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

23

The LIM module interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the demodulator). In addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator and duplicates the
main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive side in the 1+1 version.
The Matrix and the processor perform LIM Plus drop/insert of each E1 stream coming from/to 4 directions
(12 direction for a Nodal configuration).
The RIM contains:

the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM;

the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU

the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable.

The Controller performs the following:

interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, E1 WS (details are given
in the system technical specification)

contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment functionality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU

interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports

receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

5.4.4

IDU Plus Compact Unit (5.4.4)

The IDU Plus Compact unit is available in the following hardware versions:

1 unit for IDU Plus compact rack, configuration 1+0, 2/4/8/16/32xE1 + 3ETH

1 unit for IDU Plus compact rack, configuration 1+1, 2/4/8/16/32xE1 + 3ETH

The compact IDU Plus are made by a single card.


The line interfaces contain the connections of the tributaries and, by means of processes of multiplexing/
demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/
demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the
radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE
management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to
the relay contacts.

5.4.5

ODU

The ODU unit contains circuits that permit to interface from one side the IDU and the antenna from the
other side.
The QAM modulated carrier is shifted to RF frequency bands through a double conversion.
Similarly it occurs at the receive side to send the IF converted carrier to the demodulator within the IDU.
The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS.
The ODU AS is also called Universal because it can be used as SDH ODU in Siae ALS (SIAE SDH link family).
Antenna coupling is performed through a balanced or unbalanced hybrid system.

24

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

5.5

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

AL different equipment can be locally and remotely controlled via a dedicated application software called
SCT/LCT running on PC.
It provides a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboard, mouse, windows
and so on.

5.5.1

Hardware platform

The hardware platform used by SCT/LCT is based on personal computer having at least following characteristics:

microprocessor Pentium 133 MHz

32 Mbyte RAM

windows compatible graphic monitor

floppy drive 1.44 Mb

HD with 50 Mbyte of free space

Windows 95/Windows NT/Windows 98/Windows 2000/Windows XP.

5.5.2

Management ports

The SCT/LCT program is connected to the equipment via the following communication ports:

Q3 (Ethernet LAN 10BaseT)

RS232 (asynchronous serial line)

LCT (USB)

Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into the radio frame.

Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into a 16 kbit/s or 4x16 kbit/s time slot of one of
the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals.

5.5.3

Protocols

SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to reach and manage the equipment operation.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

25

Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna

LIM MODULE

RIM1 MODULE

RIM 1
RIM 2

FAIL
1

1 UNITA'

11

10

USER IN/OUT

15

16
WAY
SIDE

1
2

REM TEST

RS232

14

CH1

2Mb/s

CH2

RIM 1

+ +

Q3
LCT

13

TX RX

IDU ODU
A

12

RIM 2

IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s


CONTROLLER MODULE
RIM2 MODULE

Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity

10-100 BaseT

DPX

48V
RIM 1

1
A

IDU ODU
R

Q3
LCT

RS232

2
TX RX
1
2

REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

48V

RIM 2

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

RIM 1

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

FAIL
LINK ACT

2Mb/s

RIM 2

Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity with 4x10/100BaseT ports

DPLX
LINK 1
ACT
TXRX
TEST
1
R AL
2

DPLX
DPLX
LINK 2
LINK 3
ACT
ACT
10/100 BTX

10

11

12
PS1

13

1
Q3

LCT

USER IN/OUT

14

15
2

48V1

PS2

16
1

48V2
+

Fig.9 - Compact IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s with 3x10/100BaseT ports

26

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

IDU ODU
R

A
LCT

RS232

WAY
SIDE

REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

CH1

2Mb/s

CH2

Q3/1

Q3/2

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 17-24

Trib: 33-40

Trib: 41-48

Trib: 49-53

Trib: 25-32

FAIL

Fig.10 - Modular IDU PLUS 1+0/1+1 - up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity

10-100 BaseT

DPX

48V

Q3/2

1
IDUODU
R

Q3/1
A

LCT

RS232

WAY
SIDE

REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

Trib: 17-24

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

FAIL
LINK ACT

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.11 - Modular IDU Plus 1+1 - up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports

Q3/1
A

RS232

IDU ODU
R

48V
WAY
SIDE

REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

CH1

Q3/2

LCT

2Mb/s

CH2

FAIL

NBUS

ON

ON

48V

STM1

FAIL
2MHz

Trib: 1-8

Trib: 9-16

FAIL

Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus nodal with matrix - up to 16x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity

V11

Trib. 17-24

RS232

Trib. 25-32

DPX
2

3
ACT LINK

Q3/2

Q3/1

LCT

USER IN/OUT

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

M 3.15A 250VAC

PS
1
2

- 48VDC

2
2
48VDC

TEST
R AL

10/100 BaseT

TX RX
1
2

M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.13 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

27

EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Frequency range

see attachment

RF channelling

see attachment

Goreturn frequency

see attachment

Antenna configuration

see attachment

Frequency stability

see attachment

Spurious transmission

see attachment

Modulation

see attachment

Demodulation

Coherent

Output power

see attachment

Rx threshold

see attachment

Additional losses in Tx and Rx for 1+1 version

see attachment

BER

see attachment
BER10-3

Max RF level in Rx for

Power supply

see attachment

Consumption

see attachment

6.2
-

see attachment

SERVICE CHANNELS

Capacity of the service channels in the Modular IDU.


The following service channels are available for each type of configuration:

version 1+0/1+1 - 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2, 34, 2x34 Mbit/s (1 unit)
Three service channels available subdivided as follows:

interface V28 data channel 1x9600 with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or data channel sync./
async. RS232C 9600 baud

co/contradirectional interface V11 64 kbit/s

2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater or equal to 16x2 Mbit/s

version 1+0/1+1 high capacity - 32x2 Mbit/s (2 units)


Three service channels:

28

interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or data channel
syncr./async. RS232C 9600 baud

V11 co/contradirectional 64 kbit/s interface

2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater than 16xE1

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

version 1+0/1+1 AL Ethernet 100 Mbit/s Modular (1 unit)


Three service channels:

interface V.28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party or 2x4800 baud or data channel
sync./async. RS232C 9600 baud

2 x interfaces 2 Mbit/s wayside available on LIM as tributary 3 and 4.

Capacity of the (optional) service channels in the IDU Compact


The following capacity of the service channel is available

1+0/1+1 - version 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s (1 unit)


One service channel is available: interface 64 kbit/s V11 co/contradirectional

1+0/1+1 version 3xEthernet + 16x2 Mbit/s, no service channel

Capacity of the service channel in the Modular IDU Plus


Three service channels are available:

interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 or synchronous (or
asynchronous) data channel

V11 64 kbit/s contradirectional or 64 kbit/s codirectional interface

2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater or equal to 16xE1 (only for hierarchic capacities).

Capacities of the service channels for the IDU Compact Plus


Two service channels are available:

6.3
-

V11 and RS232


-

V11 or, in alternative, V28 interface; V11 64 kbit/s contradirectional or codirectional interface;
interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or V.24 9600
baud synchronous (or asynchronous) data channel

RS232 PPP interface for forwarding of the supervision signal

an additional external EOW module is available, connected to the IDU Compact Plus to the ports
V11 and RS232.

TRANSMISSION CAPACITY

Transmission capacity Modular IDU


-

LIM 16xE1/2xE3

64 Mbit/s

LIM 4xE1+3ETH

104 Mbit/s (see Tab.2)

LIM 16xE1+4ETH

104 Mbit/s (see Tab.2)

LIM D/I

up to 64 Mbit/s in ring with D/I up to 16xE1


Tab.2 - Ethernet traffic capacity according to the number of used E1

Capacity/modulation

Channel spacing (MHz)

Used E1

Available Ethernet band


(Mbit/s)

4 Mbit/s 4QAM

3.5

2
1

2
4

8 Mbit/s 16QAM

3.5

4
2

4
8

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

29

8 Mbit/s 4QAM

4
2

2
8

16 Mbit/s 16QAM

8
16

16 Mbit/s 4QAM

14

8
16

32 Mbit/s 16QAM

14

4+1
1

24
32

32 Mbit/s 4QAM

28

64 Mbit/s 16QAM

28

4+1
1

56
64

100 Mbit/s 32QAM

28

100

100 Mbit/s 32QAM

28

95

4+1
1

24
32

Transmission capacity Compact IDU


-

Compact IDU up to 16xE1

32 Mbit/s

Compact IDU up to 16xE1+3ETH

64 Mbit/s

Transmission capacity (Compact Modular IDU Plus)


-

Up to 53x2 Mbit/s with or


without Ethernet traffic

see Tab.3

Tab.3 - Transmission capacity Modular IDU Plus

Modulation

Channelling

Size

2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
16QAM
16QAM

3,5 MHz

1RU

4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM

7 MHz

1RU

8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s
21x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM

14 MHz

1RU

16x2 Mbit/s
21x2 Mbit/s
32x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
4QAM
16QAM

28 MHz

1RU

42x2 Mbit/s
53x2 Mbit/s

16QAM
32QAM

28 MHz

2RU

Transmission capacity (Compact IDU Plus)


-

30

Capacity

Up to 53x2 Mbit/s with or


without Ethernet traffic

105 Mbit/s

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

6.4

POWER SUPPLY, CONSUMPTION AND MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Terminal fully equipped power consumption

see attachment

IDU consumption

see Tab.4
Tab.4 - IDU consumption

IDU type

Configuration

Dissipation (W)

AL Compact 1RU

1+0

11

AL Compact 1RU

1+1

12

AL Compact PLUS

1+0

13

AL Compact PLUS

1+1

16

AL Modular 1RU

1+0

17

AL Modular 1RU

1+1

22

AL Modular 2RU

1+0

21

AL Modular 2RU

1+1

25

AL Modular 2RU

2x(1+0)

28

1+0

17

1+1

23

2x(1+0)

35

4x(1+0)

45

1+0

25

1+1

35

1+0

13

1+1

18

AL Modular Plus 1RU


AL Modular Plus 2RU D&I
32xE1
AL Plus, 2RU, 53xE1
Compact Plus 1RU 32xE1
+3ETH
-

Fuses for Modular IDU


as protection of power supply circuits of whole equipment, there is a F1 fuse on the RIM PCB behind
front panel. The fuse characteristics are:
-

Nominal current

3A

Nominal voltage

125 Vdc/ac

Type

timed

Dimensions

6.10 mm x 2.59 mm

Fuses for IDU Plus


as protection of power supply circuits of whole equipment, there is a F1 fuse on the RIM PCB behind
front panel. The fuse characteristics are:
-

Nominal current

3A

Nominal voltage

125 Vdc/ac

Type

timed

Dimensions

6.10 mm x 2.59 mm

Fuses for Compact IDU


On the IDU Compact front panel there are fuses with following characteristics:
-

Nominal current

3.15A

Nominal voltage

250 Vdc/ac

Type

Medium timed

Dimensions

5 mm x 20 mm

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

31

Fuses for IDU Compact Plus

On the IDU Compact Plus front panel there are


fuses with following characteristics:

Nominal current

3.15A

Nominal voltage

250 Vdc/ac

Type

Medium timed

Dimensions

5 mm x 20 mm

Environmental conditions
-

IDU operating range

from -5 to +45 C

ODU operating range

from -33 to +55C

IDU survival temperature range

from -10C to +55 C

ODU survival temperature range

from -40C to +60C

ODU operating humidity

95% at +35C

ODU operating humidity

in accordance with IP65

ODU dissipation

thermal resistance0.5C/W
solar heat gain 5C

Wind speed

220 km/h

Storage conditions

according to T.1.2 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 (weather


protected, not temperature cpntrolled storage
locations)

Tab.5 - Guaranteed current absorbition for power supply connector

Configuration

Imax

Modular IDU

1.13 A

High capacity Modular IDU

1.23 A

Compact IDU

1A

IDU PLus

1.25 A

Compact IDU Plus

1.20 A

Technical characteristics

see Tab.6
Tab.6 - IDU/ODU dimensions
Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

ODU AL 1+0

254

254

114

ODU AL 1+1

278

254

296

ODU AS 1+0

254

254

121

ODU AS 1+1

358

254

296

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mb/s

480

45

270

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s

480

90

270

IDU Modular 2+0 east/west repeater

480

90

270

IDU Modular Plus 32E1

480

45

270

IDU Modular Plus 53E1

480

90

270

IDU Modular Plus drop-insert

480

90

270

IDU Compact 1+0/1+1

480

45

213

IDU Compact Plus 1+0/1+1

480

45

270

32

Weight

refer to Tab.7

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.7 - IDU/ODU weight

ODU AL 1+0

4.5 kg

ODU AL 1+1

13.3 kg

ODU AS 1+0

5.5 kg

ODU AS 1+1

15.3 kg

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mbit/s

3.5/3.7 kg

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s

3.5/3.7 kg

IDU Modular 2+0 east/west repeater

3.7 kg

IDU Compact 1+0/1+1

2.5/2.6 kg

IDU Compact Plus 1+0/1+1

2.5/2.6 kg

Panning system 1+0/1+1

4.4 kg
refer to typical Fig.14 to Fig.33.

Mechanical layout

RIM1
RIM2

FAIL
1

1 UNITA'

Q3
USER IN/OUT

LCT

RS232

13

14

15

16
WAY
SIDE

CH1

+ +

11
10
12
IDU ODU TX RX
1
A
R
2
REM TEST

2Mb/s

CH2

RIM1
RIM2

IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s

Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU Modular configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors

DPLX

DPLX

LINK
ACT

FAIL

DPLX

LINK
ACT

RIM 1

LINK
ACT

RIM 2

10/100 BTX
TX RX

IDU ODU

Q3
REM

RS232

USER IN/OUT

LCT

WAY
SIDE

R
TEST

CH1

+ +

2Mb/s

CH2

RIM 1
RIM 2

Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU Modular Ethernet tributary connectors

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

Trib: A-B-C-D

Trib: E-F-G-H

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

RIM1
RIM2

FAIL
1 UNITA'

USER IN/OUT

RS232

Trib: M-N-O-P
WAY
SIDE
CH1

2Mb/s

CH2

+ +

LCT

Trib: I-J-K-L
IDUODU TX RX
1
A
R
2
Q3
REM TEST

RIM1
RIM2

Fig.16 - 1+1 IDU Modular D type tributary connectors

2
RIM 1

FAIL

RIM 2

Q3
LCT

USER IN/OUT

RS232

WAY
SIDE

1
2

REM TEST

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

+ +

TX RX

IDU ODU

RIM 1
RIM 2

Fig.17 - 1+1 Modular IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

33

RIM 1
FAIL

RIM 2
2

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

FAIL

IDU ODU
R

RIM 2

WAY
SIDE

1
2

REM TEST

RS232

USER IN/OUT

RIM 1

TX RX

Q3

LCT

+ + +

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.18 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

Trib: 9-10-11-12

Trib: 13-14-15-16

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

RIM 1
FAIL
Trib: 1-2-3-4

Trib: 5-6-7-8

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

RIM 2

RIM 1
RIM 2

FAIL
Trib: 17-18-19-20

Trib: 21-22-23-24

Trib: 25-26-27-28

Trib: 29-30-31-32

IDU ODU
R

TX RX

USER IN/OUT

WAY
SIDE

Q3
LCT

2
REM TEST

RS232

CH1

2Mb/s

CH2

Fig.19 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration D type tributary connectors

WAY
SIDE

REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

RS232

Trib: 25-32

IDU ODU
A
R

LCT

Q3/1

Trib: 17-24
Q3/2

Trib: 9-16

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.20 - IDU Modular Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s

Q3/2

Q3/1

IDU ODU
A

LCT

USER IN/OUT

RS232

WAY
SIDE

R
REM

TEST

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

FAIL

NBUS

ON

ON
FAIL

2MHz

Trib: 1-8

STM1

Trib: 9-16

FAIL

Fig.21 - IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodal 4+0

IDU ODU
R
REM TEST

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Q3/1
A

USER IN/OUT

RS232

Q3/2

LCT

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 17-24

Trib: 25-32

FAIL
Trib: 33-40

Trib: 41-48

Trib: 49-53

Fig.22 IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)

Trib. 1234

Q3

LCT

48V

USER IN/OUT

PS

TEST
R

AL
Trib. 5678

Fig.23 - IDU Compact 1+0 (2x2/4x2 Mbit/s)

34

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Trib. 1234

Q3

LCT

Trib. 9101112

48V2

48V1

USER IN/OUT

PS1

TX RX
TEST
R AL

2
Trib. 5678

Trib. 13141516

PS2

Fig.24 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)

DPLX
LINK 1
ACT
TEST
R AL

TXRX
1
2

DPLX
DPLX
2
3
LINK
LINK
ACT
ACT
10/100 BTX

10

11

12
PS1

13

14

1
LCT

Q3

USER IN/OUT

15

16
1

2
48V1

PS2

48V2

Fig.25 - IDU Compact 1+1 (coax. connector up to 16x2 Mbit/s) + Ethernet module

V11

Trib. 17-24

RS232

Trib. 25-32

DPX
2

3
ACT LINK
PS
1
2

1
Q3/2

Q3/1

LCT

USER IN/OUT

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

M 3.15A 250VAC

2
2
48VDC

TX RX
1
2

TEST
R AL

10/100 BaseT

- 48VDC

M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.26 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

V11

Trib. 17-24

RS232

Trib. 25-32

DPX
2

3
ACT LINK

1
Q3/2

Q3/1

LCT

USER IN/OUT

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

M 3.15A 250VAC

PS
1
2

- 48VDC

2
2
48VDC

TX RX
1
2

TEST
R AL

10/100 BaseT

M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.27 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)

Fig.28 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

35

Fig.29 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna

Fig.30 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)

36

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.31 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

37

Fig.32 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)

38

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.33 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

39

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT

7.1

GENERAL

The following IDU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from 5 C to +45 C.

7.2

TRIBUTARY INTERFACE

7.2.1

2 Mbit/s interface

Input side
-

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s 50 ppm

Line code

HDB3

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Return loss

12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz


18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz

Max attenuation of the input cable

6 dB according to

Accepted jitter

see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

Transfer function

see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742

Connector type

1.0/2.3, SUBD 25 pins, SCSI 50 pin

f trend

Output side

40

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s 50 ppm

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Output jitter

in accordance with G.742/G.823

Pulse shape

see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

Connector type

1.0/2.3, SUBD 25 pins, SCSI 50 pin

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

7.2.2

34 Mbit/s interface

Input side
-

Bit rate

34368 kbit/s 20 ppm

Line code

HDB3

Rated impedance

75 Ohm

Rated level

1.0 Vp/75 Ohm

Return loss

12 dB from 860 kHz to 17200 kHz


18 dB from 17200 kHz to 34368 kHz
14 dB from 34368 kHz to 51550 kHz

Max attenuation of the input cable

12 dB at 17184 kHz according to

Accepted jitter

see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

Transfer function

in accordance with G.823

Connector type

1.0/2.3

f trend

Output side
-

Bit rate

34368 kbit/s 20 ppm

Rated impedance

75 Ohm

Output jitter

0.3 U.I. from 0 Hz to 800 kHz


0.05 U.I. from 10 kHz to 800 kHz

Rated level

1.0 Vp/75 Ohm

Pulse shape

see mask in Figure 17, CCITT Rec. G.703

Connector type

1.0/2.3

7.2.3

Ethernet interface

Ethernet characteristics

IEEE 802.3 (10/100BaseT connector RJ45,


100/1000BaseX connector LC)

Ethernet switch functionalities

MAC switching
MAC learning
MAC Aging
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS
IPV4 ToS
IP-V6 TC/DSCP

7.3

STM-1 INTERFACE

The STM-1 interface can be specialized for different applications, by simply equipping the STM-1 interface
with the appropriate pluggable optical or electrical transceiver. Optical interface has LC connectors. Electric
interface has 1.0/2.3 connectors. Information about the presence/absence and type of transceiver is transferred to the main controller. The characteristics of all the possible optical interfaces are summarized in
the Tab.8.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

41

Tab.8 - Optical interface characteristics


Minimum
Operating
Transceiver
sensitivity
wavelength
(dBm)

Interface

Ref.

Launched
power
(dBm)

L-1.2

G.957

0 ... -5

-34

1480-1580

L-1.1

G.957

0 ... -5

-34

S-1.1

G.957

-8 ... -15

I-1

ANSI

-14 ... -20

Fibre

Distance
(km)

Laser

SingleMode

Up to 80

1263-1360

Laser

SingleMode

Up to 40

-28

1263-1360

Laser

SingleMode

Up to 15

-28

1263-1360

Led

MultiMode

Up to 2

The LIM is provided with Automatic Laser Shutdown as prescribed by ITU-T G.664 Recommendation.

7.3.1

Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface

Input side
-

Bit rate

155520 kbit/s 4,6 ppm

Line code

CMI

Rated impedance

75 ohm

Rated level

1 Vpp 0,1 V

Return loss

15 dB from 8 MHz to 240 MHz

Max attenuation of the input cable

12,7 dB at 78 MHz ( f law)

Output side

42

Bit rate

155520 kbit/s 4,6 ppm

Rated level

1 Vpp 0,1 V

Pulse shape

see mask of Figure 24 and 25 of ITU-T


Rec. G.703

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

7.4

SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE

7.4.1

2 Mbit/s wayside interface

Input side
-

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s 50 ppm

Line code

HDB3

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Return loss

12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz


18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz

Max attenuation of the input cable

6 dB according to

Accepted jitter

see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

Transfer function

see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742

Connector

RJ45 (in/out in commun)

f trend

Output side
-

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s 50 ppm

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Pulse shape

see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

Output jitter

in accordance with G.742/G.823

Connector

RJ45 (in/out in commun)

7.4.2

64 kbit/s codirectional interface

Tolerance

100 ppm

Coding

synch + data + octet as per G.703

Impedance

120 Ohm

Max attenuation of the input cable

3 dB at 128 kHz

User side

see CCITT Rec. G.703

1 Vp/120 Ohm 0.1 V

Input/output level

Return loss

see tables at par. 1.2.1.3 in CCITT Rec. G.703

Connector

RJ45

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

43

7.4.3

64 kbit/s contradirectional interface V.11

Tolerance

100 ppm

Equipment side

contradirectional

Coding

clock and data on independent wires

Electrical interface

see Rec. CCITT V.11

Connector

RJ45

7.4.4

Analogue interface

Electrical characteristics

as per Recc. G.712

Input level

from 14 dBr to +1 dBr/600 Ohm

Output level

from 11 dBr to +4 dBr/600 Ohm

7.4.5

9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data

Data interface

RS232

Electrical interface

CCITT Rec. V.28

Input speed

9600 baud

Control wires

DTR, DSR, DCD

Connector

RJ45

7.4.6

9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data

Electrical interface

CCITT Rec. V.28

Input speed

4800 or 9600 bit/s

Electrical interface

V.28

Connector

RJ45

7.4.7

Alarm interface

User output

44

Relay contacts

normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)

Open contacts Rmin

100 Mohm at 500 Vdc

Closed contacts Rmax

0.5 Ohm

Switching voltage Vmax

100 V

Switching current Imax

1A

Connector

SUB-D 9 pin

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

User input
-

Equivalent circuit recognized as a closed contact

200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to ground

Equivalent circuit recognized as an open contact

60 kOhm (min) referred to ground

Connector

SUB-D 9 pin

7.4.8

Network Management Interface

RJ45 interface
-

LAN type

Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT

Connector

RJ45

Connection to LAN

direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair

Protocol

TCP/IP or IPoverOSI

BNC interface
-

LAN type

Ethernet thinnet 802.3 10Base2

Connector

BNC

Connection to LAN

RG58 coax. cable 50 Ohm

Protocol

TCP/IP or IPoverOSI

RS232 interface
-

Electrical interface

V.28

Asynchronous baud rate

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600

Protocol

PPP

LCT RS232 interface


-

Electrical interface

V.28

Asynchronous baud rate

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600

Protocol

PPP

LCT USB interface


-

Electrical interface

USB 1.1 version

Baud rate

1.5 Mbit/s

Protocol

PPP

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

45

7.5
-

MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR

Carrier IF mo-demodulating frequency


-

Tx side

330 MHz

Rx side

140 MHz

Type of modulation

4QAM/16QAM/32QAM

Type of coding

BCM

Modulating signal

from 4 Mbit/s to 106 Mbit/s depending on


different capacities

Equalization

5 taps

Coding gain

2.5 dB at 106
1 dB at 103

7.6

CABLE INTERFACE

Interconnection with the ODU unit

single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx

Cable length

ODU AL: 370 m 4/16/32QAM


ODU AS: 300 m 4/16/32QAM

Rated impedance

50 Ohm

Signal running along the cable


-

Tx nominal frequency

330 MHz

Rx nominal frequency

140 MHz

Transceiver management signals

388 kbit/s bidirectional

Remote power supply

direct from battery voltage

7.7

AVAILABLE LOOPS

The following loop are available within the IDU:

46

line tributary loop

internal tributary loop

baseband loop

IDU loop.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR


34 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES

8.1

1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU VERSION

Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM module the Modular IDU consists of.

8.1.1

LIM

The LIM performs the following operations:

multiplexing process of the input tributaries

aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit

processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM modulator takes place within the RIM

duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level.

Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a chip set. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.

8.1.2

Circuit description

Tx side
Refer to Fig.34.
The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The
multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.
Attached figures show different multiplexing scheme as follows:

Fig.35 2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation and generates a proprietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

Fig.36 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and
generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

Fig.37 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a
8448 kbit/s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

Fig.38 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups
each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion.
Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

47

Fig.39 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s
groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the
achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc.
G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process
before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

Fig.40 32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two LIMs (master and slave) each of
one manipulating two 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure
as per Recc. G.751.
The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the master LIM for aggregation and stuffing process. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

Fig.41 2x34 Mbit/s multiplexing. The two 34368 kbit/s tributaries are directly sent to the Bit Insertion for aggregation and stuffing process. Opposite situation occurs at the Rx side.

In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Controller module.
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation occurring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented:
Tab.9 - Aggregate frame
Version

Aggregate frame

2 Mbit/s

2430 kbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s

4860 kbit/s

4x2 Mbit/s

9720 kbit/s

8x2 Mbit/s

19440 kbit/s

16x2/34 Mbit/s

38880 kbit/s

32x2/2x34 Mbit/s

77760 kbit/s

The aggregate frame contains:

the main signal from the MUX(s)

the framed service signal from the service MUX

the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

the frame alignment word

the bits dedicated to the FEC.

All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0
at 38.88 MHz
The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.34) of the modulating signal to be sent to the
mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM.
The digital process includes:

serial to parallel conversion

differential encoding

generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.

Rx side
Refer to Fig.42.
From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:

48

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

clock recovery

frequency and phase carrier locking

baseband equalisation and filtering

bit polarity decision

differential decoding

parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

BER estimate measurement

radio performances

HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken directly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.
The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.10.
The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic synchronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.
Tab.10 - Switching priority
Priority
Highest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Lowest

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Levels

Description

Priority 1

RIM PSU Alarm

Priority 2

Manual forcing (from main controller)

Priority 3

Cable Short Alarm

Priority 3

Cable Open Alarm

Priority 3

IF Unit Alarm

Priority 3

Demodulator Failure

Priority 3

Base Band Unit Failure Alarm

Priority 3

ODU Unit Failure

Priority 3

ODU PSU Alarm

Priority 3

VCO Failure Alarm

Priority 3

High BER >103 (or 104 or 105, selectable by software)

Priority 4

Low BER > 106 (or 107 or 108, selectable by software)

Priority 5

Early Warning BER > 109 (or 1010 or 1011 or 1012, selectable by software)

Priority 6

RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99


dBm)

Priority 7

CRC Pulse

Priority 8

Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)

49

8.1.3

RIM

Refer to Fig.43.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

IF part of the QAM modulator

IF part of the QAM demodulator

power supply

telemetry IDU/ODU

8.1.3.1

QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits:

recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

330 MHz local oscillator

a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers

a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

8.1.3.2

QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM demodulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

8.1.3.3

Power supply

The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.
The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable.
An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

8.1.3.4

Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

50

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

8.1.4

CONTROLLER

The controller module performs the following:

interfaces the service signals

houses the equipment software for equipment management

interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

8.1.4.1

Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.

The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.

8.1.4.2

Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.44.

Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:

Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.45 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
-

LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

USB port for 1+0 version

RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection

RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs

EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.

Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

51

Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of activating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

8.1.4.3

Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:

LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600

LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols

EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the supervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

8.2

IDU LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.46.

8.2.1

Tributary loop

Tributary local loop


Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop


Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

8.2.2

Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

52

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

CK

NRZ

NRZ
Code
converter CK

services

Controller
module

Service
channel
module

MUX
NRZ 2/2x2/4x2
8x2/16x2
Code
converter CK 32x2/2x34
see
Fig.23
through
Fig.29

Code
converter

2 Mbit/s only (16x2/34 or


wayside higher speed

nx2
.
.
.
nx34

2/34 Mbit/s
G.703

synchr.

Frame
generator

BI:
- main traffic
- services
- EOC
- FEC
- FAW

to/from main
controller

- FSK mod/demod
- 388 frame
generator/receiver

X0 38.88 MHz

Digital MOD
- S/P convertion
- diff. encoding
- modulating
signal
generation
D/A

I&Q

D/A I&Q

to RIM2

to RIM1

8.2.3
IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connected to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.

Fig.34 - LIM block diagram Tx side

53

Aggregate Ck

Ck
2/34 Mbit/s

MUX
proprietary
frame

B.I.
Tx data
Ck

2/34 Mbit/s

DEMUX
proprietary
frame

B.E.
Rx data

Fig.35 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing

Aggregate Ck

Ck
2x2 Mbit/s

MUX
proprietary
frame

B.I.
Tx data

Ck
2x2 Mbit/s

DEMUX
proprietary
frame

B.E.
Rx data

Fig.36 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

Aggregate Ck
4x2 Mbit/s
Ck
MUX 2 ->8
G.742

4x2 Mbit/s

B.I.
Framed data
8448 Tx
Ck

DEMUX
2 ->8
G.742

B.E.
Framed data
8448 Rx

Fig.37 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

54

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Aggregate Ck
4x2 Mbit/s
Ck
MUX 2 ->8
G.742

Data

B.I.

4x2 Mbit/s

MUX 2 ->8
G.742

4x2 Mbit/s

Framed data
8448 Tx
Data

Ck 8448 kHz Tx
DEMUX
8 -> 2
G.742

Data

B.E.

4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 -> 2
G.742
Framed data
8448 Rx
Fig.38 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

55

2 Mbit/s wayside

Aggregate Ck

Stuffing

4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742

B.I.

4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742

Ck 34368 kHz Tx

4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742

Framed data 34368


kbit/s

Ck 8448 kHz Tx
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
8->34
G.751

MUX
2 ->8
G.742
Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx
2 Mbit/s wayside

Aggregate Ck

Destuffing
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742

B.E.

4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742

Ck 34368 kHz

4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742

Framed data 34368


kbit/s

Ck 8448 kHz
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
34->8
G.751

DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx

Fig.39 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

56

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1 set of 16x2 Mbit/s

Aggregate Ck

2 Mbit/s interface

8448 k
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
8448 k
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2

8448 k

Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2

8448 k

Mux
Demux
8->34
34->8

77600 kbit/s

34368 k
BI/BE

LIM Master

2 Mbit/s interface

2 set of 16x2 Mbit/s


Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2

8448 k

Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2

8448 k

Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2

8448 k

Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2

8448 k

Mux
Demux
8->34
34->8

34368 k

LIM Slave
Fig.40 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing

Aggregate Ck
34368 k
77600 kbit/s
34368 k

BI/BE

Fig.41 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

57

Fig.42 - LIM block diagram Rx side

58

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

I&Q from
RIM2

I&Q
from
RIM1

same as
above

Ck recovery
Carrier lock
Equaliz. & filt.
Decision
Diff. decod.
S/P

BER extimates
High BER
Low BER
EW

CRC
analysis
& aligner

from
main
P

switch
controls

SW
logic

FEC

BE

BER meas.
P.M.

Service
channel
DEMUX

DEMUX
2/2x2/4x2
8x2/16x2
32x2/2x34
See
Fig.23
through
Fig. 29

Code
converter

Controller
module

2/34 Mbit/s
G.703

Services

nx2
or nx34 Mbit/s

Code
converter

Code
converter

Fig.43 - RIM block diagram

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

59

to LIM

battery
-48 V

from LIM

I&Q

I&Q

DEM
QAM
(IF part)

17.5 MHz

5.5 MHz

330 MHz

DC

Cable
equaliz.

DC

Remote power supply

Overcurrent
protect.

from LIM

to LIM

QAM
MOD
(IF part)

Step
down

I/V
protect

-5 V

+3.6 V

Cable
interface

Fig.44 - Main and peripheral controller connection

60

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Peripheral
controller

LCT

User In

ODU1

388 kb/s
gen/rec.

ODU2

338 kb/s
gen/rec.

388 kbit/s

FSK
modem

FSK
modem
388 kbit/s

FSK
modem

FSK
modem

Alarm/
User Out

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver

Main controller

RS232

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver

LAN

Peripheral
controller

EOC

APPLICATION

SOFTWARE

Applic./present.
session layers

SNMP

Transport
layer

TCP/UDP

IPoverOSI

Routing
layer

IP

IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link
layer

PPP

PPP

LLC
MAC

LAPD
Q921

LCC
MAC

Physical
layer

RS232

EOC

Ethernet
LAN

EOC

Ethernet
LAN

Fig.45 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

61

Fig.46 - IDU loopback

62

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Trib. loc. loop

Trib. OUT

Trib. IN
Trib. rem.
loop

LIM

DEMUX

MUX

BE

BI

DEM

140

330

BB loop

MOD

RIM

from ODU

140 MHz

IDU loop

330 MHz
to ODU

DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU WITH LIM


ETHERNET (2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES + ETHERNET
TRAFFIC)

Description that follows covers indoor unit with Ethernet ports, 1+0/1+1 Modular version. Paragraph 9.1.1
LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries deals with 2 Mbit/s signals and paragraph 9.1.3 LIM Ethernet: Ethernet
traffic deals with Ethernet traffic treatment.
LIM Ethernet contains all the circuits of LIM with 2 Mbit/s interfaces plus some specific circuits for Ethernet
interface.

9.1

1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU

Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules contained into IDU.

9.1.1

LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries

The LIM Ethernet performs the following operations:

multiplexing process of the input tributaries

aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit

processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM modulator takes place within the RIM

duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level

concatenation of 2 Mbit/s streams

connection between a local LAN port and a remote LAN port.

Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a chip set. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.

9.1.2

Circuit description

Tx side
The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The
multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.
In the following are described different multiplations:

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

63

2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation and generates a proprietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite
operation occurs at the Rx side.

4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a 8448 kbit/
s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups each
of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s groups
each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the
achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc.
G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process
before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two multiplexers of 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of
one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure as per Recc. G.751.
The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the LIM for aggregation and stuffing process.
The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I.
Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Controller module.
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation occurring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented:
Tab.11 - Aggregate frame
Version

Aggregate frame

2 Mbit/s

2430 kbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s

4860 kbit/s

4 Mbit/s

4860 kbit/s

8 Mbit/s

9720 kbit/s

16 Mbit/s

19440 kbit/s

32 Mbit/s

38880 kbit/s

64 Mbit/s

77760 kbit/s

The aggregate frame contains:

the main signal from the MUX(s)

the framed service signal from the service MUX

the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

the frame alignment word

the bits dedicated to the FEC.

The LIM also includes the processing in digital form of the modulating signal to be sent to the mixers of
the QAM modulator within the RIM.
The digital process includes:

64

serial to parallel conversion

differential encoding

generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Rx side
From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:

clock recovery

frequency and phase carrier locking

baseband equalisation and filtering

bit polarity decision

differential decoding

parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

BER estimate measurement

radio performances

HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken directly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.
The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.12.
The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic synchronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.
Tab.12 - Switching priority
Priority
Highest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Lowest

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Levels

Description

Priority 1

RIM PSU Alarm

Priority 2

Manual forcing (from main controller)

Priority 3

Cable Short Alarm

Priority 3

Cable Open Alarm

Priority 3

IF Unit Alarm

Priority 3

Demodulator Failure

Priority 3

Base Band Unit Failure Alarm

Priority 3

ODU Unit Failure

Priority 3

ODU PSU Alarm

Priority 3

VCO Failure Alarm


3

(or 104 or 105, selectable by software)

Priority 3

High BER >10

Priority 4

Low BER > 106 (or 107 or 108, selectable by software)

Priority 5

Early Warning BER > 109 (or 1010 or 1011 or 1012, selectable by software)

Priority 6

RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99


dBm)

Priority 7

CRC Pulse

Priority 8

Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)

65

9.1.3

LIM Ethernet: Ethernet traffic

Two versions of LIM Ethernet are available. They only differs for interface number:

LIM Ethernet

4x2 Mbit/s + 3x10/100BaseT

LIM Ethernet

16x2 Mbit/s + 4x10/100BaseT

In the following Ethernet interface circuits are described.


For the description of all the other circuits relative to 2 Mbit/s interface and the structure of LIM please
refer to previous paragraph. LIM Ethernet is equipped with the following interfaces:

electrical interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseT IEEE 802.3

from 0 to 4x2 Mbit/s (E1) interface

total capacity from 2 to 64 Mbit/s or 105 Mbit/s

Most important functions of LIM Ethernet are:

concatenation of Ethernet traffic in 2 Mbit/s tributaries and relevant multiplation

LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH (ITU X.86) for concatenated 2 Mbit/s

switch between a local LAN port and the radio LAN port

MAC switching

MAC address learning

MAC address aging

Ethernet interface with autonegotiation 10/100, full duplex, half duplex


-

Ethernet interface with Flow Control, Back Pressure, MDI/MDX crossover

network segmentation into the switch

virtual LAN as per IEEE 802.1q (anyone from 0 to 4095 VID for a maximum of 64 memory location)
(see Fig.52)

layer 2 QoS, priority management as per IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.52)

layer 3 ToS/DSCP (see Fig.54 and Fig.55)

packet forwarding

A block diagram of LIM Ethernet module can be found into Fig.51.


Into LIM Ethernet there is a switch with 3 external ports and 1internal ports. External ports are electrical
Ethernet 10/100BaseT interfaces placed on the front panel. Internal port is connected to radio side stream.
Ethernet traffic coming from external ports goes to internal port radio side. The radio side port is connected
to one or two streams group of concatenated 2 Mbit/s. One stream for capacity up to 16x2 Mbit/s and two
streams for capacity of 12 16 2 Mbit/s streams, plus other 16x2 Mbit/s streams in case of maximum
capacity.
In Tx side Ethernet traffic is packet into a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. The resulting stream is
divided into the used number of 2 Mbit/s streams. The 2 Mbit/s streams are then multiplexed, like into
standard LIM, together with 2 Mbit/s arriving from front panel, the resulting stream goes to the modulator,
see Fig.51.
In Rx the stream arriving from the demodulator is divided into the 2 Mbit/s streams, like into standard LIM,
then the 2 Mbit/s not used into the front panel 2 Mbit/s are concatenated and sent to Ethernet circuits.
Resulting stream, after LAPS protocol control, is sent to switch internal port.

9.1.3.1

2 Mbit/s tributaries

LIM Ethernet module uses the 16x2 Mbit/s mode of AL radio link. Tributary channels at 2 Mbit/s (E1) are
connected to 8 coaxial connectors 1.0/2.3 into front panel. 2 Mbit/s streams are multiplexed as into standard LIM.
From 0 to 16 2 Mbit/s tributaries can be selected to be used via SCT/LCT program, all the other available
2 Mbit/s are sent to switch internal port.

66

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

For 100 Mbit/s version can be selected up to 2 tributaries, position number 3 and 4 in tributary connectors
are available for wayside connection (2 Mbit/s each).

9.1.3.2

Electrical Ethernet interface

The electrical Ethernet/Fast Ethernet interfaces are type IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT with RJ45 connector. For
input or output signals at RJ45 please refer to chapter 19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS. Cable can
be UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Category 5.
Standard coding:

Ethernet 10 Mbit/s: Manchester

Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s: MLT3 ternary

EMC/EMI protection:

input and output pins are galvanically isolated through a transformer

to reduce EMI every pin at RJ45 connector is terminated even if not used

two signal lines are equipped with low capacity secondary protection to sustain residuals of possible
electrostatic discharges (ESD).
With LCT/SCT program it is possible to activate autonegotiation (speed/duplex/flow control) on 10/
100BaseT interface.

9.1.3.3

Front panel LEDs

On FEM front panel there are a total of 6 Leds. There are 2 Leds for any Ethernet interface:

DUPLEX: colour green, On = full duplex, OFF = half duplex

LINK/ACT: colour green, ON = link up without activity, OFF = link down, BLINKING = link with activity on Rx and Tx.

9.1.3.4

Switch function

A radio link AL equipped with a LIM/Ethernet module can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:

to connect two separated LANs at a distance even greater than the maximum limits of 2.5 km (for
Ethernet)

to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network

to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
traffic in a single LAN.

The switch realized into LIM/Ethernet module is transparent (IEEE 802.1d and 802.q) into the same Vlan
described by VLAN Configuration Table. It works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched
Layer 3 and it takes care to send traffic from a local LAN to another (Local or Remote). Routing is only on
the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC.
The operation is the following:

when a LAN interface receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address, it decides which
LAN to send it

if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded

if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)

otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

67

The switch is very different from a Hub, which copies slavishly everything that receives from a line on all
the others. The switch, in fact, acquires a frame, analyses it, reconstruct it and routes it and compensates
also the different speeds of the interfaces, therefore an input can be at 100 Mbit/s and output at 10 Mbit/s.
The mechanism is the following:

from the moment of its activation, the switch examines all the frames that arrive it from different
LANs, and on these basis it builds its routing tables progressively.
In fact, every received frame allows to know on what LAN the sending station is located (MAC address learning).

every frame that arrives to the switch is rebroadcasted:

if the switch has the destination address into the routing table, sends the frame only into the
corresponding LAN

otherwise the frame is sent to all the LANs except the originating (flooding)

as soon as the swicth increases its knowledge of different machines, the retransmission becomes
more and more selective (and therefore more efficient)

the routing tables are updated every some minutes (programmable), removing addresses not alive
in the last period (so, if a machine is moved, within a few minute it is addressed correctly) (MAC
address aging).

The whole process is restricted to the ports which are members of the same Vlan as described into Vlan
Configuration Table.

9.1.3.5

Ethernet Full Duplex function

The first realizations of the Ethernet network were on coaxial cable with the 10Base5 standard.
According to this standard Ethernet interfaces (e.g. PC) are connected to the coaxial cable in parallel and
are normally in receiving mode. Only one PC, at a certain time, transmits on the cable, the others are receiving, so this is half duplex mode, and only one PC uses the received message.
Then the coaxial cable was progressively replaced by the pairs cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) as per
10BaseT standard. Normally there are four pairs into UTP Cat5 cable but two pairs are used with 10BaseT,
one for Tx one for Rx. Into 10Base5 and 10BaseT standards, network protocols are the same the difference
lays into the electrical interface. UTP cable is connected point to point between a hub and a Ethernet interface. Network structure is a star where the server is connected to a hub and from this a UTP cable is
laid down for each Ethernet interface starts.
The further step is to replace the hub with a more powerful equipment, e.g. a switch. In this case it is
possible to activate transmission on both pairs at the same time, on one twisted pair for one direction, on
the other pair for opposite direction. Thus we obtain full duplex transmission on UTP.
Activating full duplex transmission it is possible to obtain a theoretical increase of performance of nearly
100%. Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation
100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.

9.1.3.6

Link Loss Forwarding

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of ethernet interface.


LLF can be enabled or disabled. If LLF is enabled an US radio alarm condition will generate the alarm status
of Ethernet interface blocking any transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports at front panel. With
LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not available and can temporarily reroute the traffic.

9.1.3.7

MDI/MDIX crossover

The Ethernet electrical interface into FEM module can be defined by SCT program as MDI or MDIX to cross
over between pairs so that external crossover cable is not required.

68

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

9.1.3.8

VLAN functionality

LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag for VLANs and QoS see Fig.52.
The virtual LAN (VLAN) are logical separated subnets so that all the stations, into VLAN, seem to be into
the same physical LAN segment even if they are geographically separated.
The VLAN are used to separate traffic on the same physical LAN too. Station operating on the same physical
LAN but on different VLAN work in separated mode thus they do not share broadcast and multicast messages. This results in a reduction of broadcast generated traffic and above all we get more security thanks
to network separation.
Tag position and structure are shown into Fig.52.
Tag is made up with:

a fixed word of 2 bytes

3 bits for priority according 802.1p

1 fixed bit

12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according 802.1q.

Switch crossconnections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output
ports should be defined for any used VID.
Vlan Configuration Table has 64 position for Vlan ID range from 1 to 4095.

9.1.3.9

Switch organized by port

The switch can be organized on port basis treating both Tagged and Untagged packets in the same way.
For each input port it is possible to define where to route the incoming traffic; one or more of the other
ports can be Enabled to exit the incoming traffic. These types of connection are monodirectional. For a
dibirectional connection between a generic Lan A and Lan B it is necessary to set the connection from Lan
A to Lan B and from Lan B to Lan A.
LIM Ethernet has external ports and one internal port, radio side. The internal switch can connect two or
more ports together.
Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. It is possible to select that a packet follows
the description of Vlan Configuration Table for its Vlan ID.
Another selection is to follow only Vlan Configuration Table.
Packets can exit from a port as Unmodified or all Tagged either all Untagged. Unteggad packets will take
default tags.
For output operations there are 3 selections:

unmodified: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged

tagged: all the packets will exit tagged, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.

untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.

9.1.3.10

Switch organized by VLAN ID

Vlan Configuration Table


Vlan Configuration Table defines a list of Vlan ID, For any Vlan ID some ports are members of Vlan others
are not members. Ports members of a Vlan are allowed to receive and send packets with that Vlan. Switch
dinamically assigns packets to the output port according their VLAN ID.
Packets arent sent out to that port unless they belong to one of the Vlan of which the port is a member.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

69

The ports, from which the packet can be sent, are defined in the VLAN Table. The VLAN of incoming packet
is filtered only if the parameter Ingress Filtering Check is set as Secure.
After having filtered the ports from which packet can go out according to VALN Table, the control of packet
and port Vlan membership MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.

Ingress Filtering Check


This is a process to check an incoming packet to compare its Valn ID to input ports Vlan membership. With
Ingress Filtering Check it is possible to permit only to tagged packets to enter the switch. If the port is not
member of the Vlan n. XX all the incoming packets with Vlan ID XX will be dropped.
There are 3 option into Ingress Filtering Check to manage incoming packets:

Disable: all Tagged and Untagged packets can transit into the switch following setting of switch organized by port.

Fallback: Incoming packets without TAG 802.1q follow the rules of switch organized by port, Tagged
frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged
frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of switch organized by port.

Secure: Incoming packets without TAG 802.1q cannot enter the switch, Tagged frames with Vlan
ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan
ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table cannot enter the switch.

Operations at the input. At the input port the packet is received and a switching decision must be made.
The switch analyses the Vlan ID (if present) and decides whether and where to forward the frame. If the
received packet is untagged, the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port Lan per
port settings. If the packet is tagged the switch check the other destination ports to find at least one with
the same Vlan ID and put the packet into output port queue. If the Vlan ID is not listed into Vlan Configuration Table the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port Lan per port settings.
Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.
Operations at the output. For each output port there are the following selections for outgoing packets.

Disable output port

Enable unchanged: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged.

Enable tagged: all the packets will exit tagged with Vlan ID specified into Vlan Configuration Table,
tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.

Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.

9.1.3.11

Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p

Some services as voice overIP and videoconference have some time limits to work properly. A solution is
to increase the priority of time sensitive packets. In this case random crowding coming from other services
affects the delay of prioritized packets a lot less.
Into LIM Ethernet module different priority of incoming packets is managed using Tag defined into IEEE
802.1p (see Fig.52).
Every switch output port holds 4 output queues: queue 4 has highest priority, queue 0 has the lowest priority (see Fig.53).
Priority can be organized by incoming port or by incoming priority tag:

70

Priority by incoming port. For Untagged packets at each input ports it is decided to send the packets
to one of the 4 queues of output ports defining which is the Default Priority Queue: Queue = 0, 1,
2, 3. For Tagged packets it is necessary to Disable Priority so they will go in the same queue of
Untagged packets.

Priority by incoming priority. For tagged packets for each priority tag (3 bits = for 7 priority levels)
it is possible to define where to send the packets, into Queue from 0 to 3. Priority must be enable
on 802.1p mode only or IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and
IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode
and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode and then 808.1q. For untagged packets the priority
is defined only by incoming port..

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Outgoing packet policy at output ports can be WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) with fixed proportional output
policy (8 packets from Queue 3, 4 from Queue 2, 4 from Queue 1, 1 from Queue 0) or Strict Priority that means that a queue completely empties before processing the next one.

9.1.3.12

Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IPV4 ToS (DSCP)

Only for IP packets it is possible to use incoming Layer 3 ToS (see Fig.54) to prioritize incoming packets.
The 8 bits available can be read as 7 bits of ToS or 6 bits of DSCP as shown in Fig.55.
According priority defined into ToS/DSCP the packet is sent into high priority queue low priority queue of
output ports.
With SCT/LCT program it is possible to select a different output queue for any ToS/DSCP priority level at
each input port.

9.1.4

RIM

Refer to Fig.47.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

IF part of the QAM modulator

IF part of the QAM demodulator

power supply

telemetry IDU/ODU.

9.1.4.1

QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits:

recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

330 MHz local oscillator

a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers

a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

9.1.4.2

QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM demodulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

9.1.4.3

Power supply

The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

71

Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.


The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

9.1.4.4

Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

9.1.5

CONTROLLER

The controller module performs the following:

interfaces the service signals

houses the equipment software for equipment management

interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

9.1.5.1

Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.

The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.
For 100 Mbit/s version the following service channels are available:

9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

2x2 Mbit/s wayside G.703 channels.

9.1.6

Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.48.

72

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:

Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.49 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
-

LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

USB port for 1+0 version

RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection

RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs

EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.

Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of activating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

9.1.6.1

Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:

LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600

LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols

EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the supervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

73

9.2

IDU LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.50.

9.2.1

Tributary loop

Tributary local loop


Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop


Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

9.2.2

Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

9.2.3

IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connected to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.

74

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.47 - RIM block diagram

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

75

to LIM

battery
-48 V

from LIM

I&Q

I&Q

DC
DC

Cable
equaliz.

Overcurrent
protect.

DEM
QAM
(IF part)

17.5 MHz

5.5 MHz

330 MHz

Step
down

I/V
protect

Remote power supply

from LIM

to LIM

QAM
MOD
(IF part)

-5 V

+3.6 V

Cable
interface

ODU2

Peripheral
controller
gen/rec.

338 kb/s

388 kbit/s

FSK
modem

FSK
modem

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver

EOC
Alarm/
User Out

ODU1

388 kb/s
gen/rec.
Peripheral
controller

FSK
modem

FSK
modem

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver

388 kbit/s

Main controller

User In
LCT
RS232
LAN

Fig.48 - Main and peripheral controller connection

APPLICATION

SOFTWARE

Applic./present.
session layers

SNMP

Transport
layer

TCP/UDP

IPoverOSI

Routing
layer

IP

IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link
layer

PPP

PPP

LLC
MAC

Physical
layer

RS232

EOC

Ethernet
LAN

LAPD
Q921

EOC

LCC
MAC

Ethernet
LAN

Fig.49 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

76

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.50 - IDU loopback

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

77

Trib. loc. loop

Trib. OUT

Trib. IN
Trib. rem.
loop

LIM

DEMUX

MUX

BE

BI

DEM

140

330

BB loop

MOD

RIM

140 MHz
from ODU

IDU loop

to ODU

330 MHz

2 Mbit/s

10/100BaseT

MUX
16x2
Mbit/s

MUX
16x2
Mbit/s

CONCATENATED 2 Mbit/s

0-4x2 Mbit/s

10/100BaseT

10/100BaseT

10/100BaseT

LAPS

Only for 32x2 Mbit/s version

PDH
radio

PDH RADIO

Fig.51 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram

78

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Ethernet Layer 2 Header, non-802.1p


Destination

Source

Type/Length

Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p


Source

Destination

Type/Length

Tag Control Info

Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p


3 bit priority
12-bit 802.1q VLAN Identifier

Canonical

Tagged frame type interpretation field 802.1p

8100 h
3-Bits

2-Bytes

1-Bit

12-Bits

Type = 2 byte (8100)


Level 2 priority (802.1p) = 3 bit (value from 0 to 7)
Level 2 VLAN (802.1q) = 12 bit (value from 1 to 4095)
Canonical form = 1 bit (shows if MAC addresses of current frame are with canonical form:
- C = 0 canonical form (MAC with LSB at left) (always into Ethernet 802.3 frames)
- C = 1 canonocal form (MAC with MSB ay left) (token ring and some FDDI)

Fig.52 - Tag control into field

Queue 3

Queue 2
Input port
Output Port

Queue 1

Queue 0

Fig.53 - Output queues

Version

IHL

TOS

16
Total Length
Flags

Total Length
TTL

Protocol ID

Fragment Offset
Header Checksum

Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
Padding

Options

Data

Fig.54 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

79

MSB
0

LSB
1

DSCP

Not used

ToS

Not used

Fig.55 - ToS/DSCP

80

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

10

DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR


2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES

10.1

IDU COMPACT 1+0/1+1 VERSION

The IDU Compact unit is made by a single motherboard which contains all the circuit that realize the following functionalities:

line interface

radio interface

equipment controller

IDU loop.

Inside it, we can distinguish the circuits LIM, RIM, CONTROLLER, as described in the chapter regarding the
Modular IDU.
The IDU Compact is realized in 1+0 version, containing only one RIM, and 1+1 version, containing two
RIMs. The maximum capacity of the IDU Compact is 16x2 Mbit/s.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

81

11

DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR


2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES AND FOR ETHERNET
TRAFFIC

11.1

VERSION IDU COMPACT ETHERNET 1+0/1+1

The compact IDU can be provided with only one optional Ethernet module. In this way, the equipment has
both 2 Mbit/s port and Ethernet ports and the bit rate assigned to the Ethernet traffic is the rated capacity
of the radio decreased by the enabled tributaries.
The module with the Ethernet interface is in alternative to the optional module with the service channels
V11, V28 + RS232.
The IDU Compact Ethernet is equipped with the following tributary interfaces:

3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT IEEE 802.3 electrical interfaces

16 2 Mbit/s (E1) interfaces.

The total capacity is from 4 to 64 Mbit/s.


For the description of the signal processing at 2 Mbit/s, refer to the chapter 8 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES.
For the description of the Ethernet signal processing, refer to chapter 9 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR
IDU WITH lim ETHERNET (2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES + ETHERNET TRAFFIC).

82

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

12

DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU PLUS FOR


2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES HIERARCHIC AND NOT
HIERARCHIC

12.1

GENERAL

The indoor unit IDU Plus is housed into a 1 Rack Unit (1RU) or 2 Rack Unit (2RU) and can have the following
configurations:

terminal

drop-insert

nodal.

Radio side stream has a PDH structure NxE1 but user interface can be NxE1 or SDH STM-1 partially filled.
Modulation and capacity are programmable. Other characteristics are:

hierarchic transport up to 32E1

not hierarchic transport up to 53E1

tributaries: E1 (2 Mbit/s), STM1, Ethernet

managing up to 4 directions with drop-insert and cross-connection capability of 2 Mbit/s streams

combined IDU plus can create a nodal system to interface up to 12 radios (ODU)

path protection for E1 streams with drop-insert configuration

dynamic modulation with automatic switch from 16QAM to 4QAM and viceversa, based on BER and/
or on the RX signal power

internal PRBS generator and receiver on a E1 streams

local Tx switch managed by Rx alarms on remote equipment

modulation 4QAM, 16QAM, 32QAM

12.2

COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU

For 1RU composition see Fig.56:


1

LIM 32E1 or LIM STM1+16E1

equipment controller

RIM

cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration


1

4
Fig.56 - IDU + 1RU composition

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

83

12.3

COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU

For 2RU composition see Fig.57:


1

equipment controller

LIM 32E1 o LIM STM1+16E1

expansion 53E1

cover

RIM

cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration

cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration

cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration


1

8
Fig.57 - IDU + 2RU composition

12.4

1RU TERMINAL

With 1 Rack Unit it is possible to configure a 1+0 or 1+1 terminal and to manage up to 32E1 tributaries
with LIM32E1 or up to 53x2Mbit/s streams with LIM STM1+16E1 (16 are physical 2 Mbit/s other 37 are
built in STM1 stream). Capacity and configuration are listed in Tab.13.
Tab.13 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations

84

Capacity

Modulation

Spectrum use

Size

2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
16QAM
16QAM

3,5 MHz

1RU

4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM

7 MHz

1RU

8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s
20x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM

14 MHz

1RU

16x2 Mbit/s
20x2 Mbit/s
32x2 Mbit/s

4QAM
4QAM
16QAM

28 MHz

1RU

42x2 Mbit/s
53x2 Mbit/s

16QAM
32QAM

28 MHz

2RU

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

12.5

2RU TERMINAL

With 2 unit IDU Plus it is possible to manage up to 53 tributaries E1 with the following configurations:

terminal 1+0

terminal 1+1

terminal 2x (1+0)

12.6

2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE

The 2 Mbit/s tributary interface is 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm. Both interfaces are present into the front panel
connectors the user can select the interface to use, preparing in the correct way the relevant cabling.

12.7

MATRIX STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU)

Matrix module provides 16x2 Mbit/s interfaces and one SDH STM1 port. STM1 port is protected by two
STM1 interfaces that can be available electrical or optical (different 2 plug-in modules).
STM1 is terminated and the contained E1 streams are sent to switch matrix, where E1 streams can be redirected towards radio link, towards 2 Mbit/s interface or remapped into STM-1, or by means of NBUS towards other IDUs equipped with Matrix. Modular IDU Plus is operating in MST mode and has a complete
SETS synchronisation circuit with input and output synchronisation signals.
Maximum capacity of LIM STM1+16E1 is:

53E1 for terminal 1+0

53E1 for terminal 1+1

79E1 for terminal 2x(1+0).

12.8

DROP-INSERT (2RU)

For 2RU subrack composition see Fig.57:


1

equipment controller

processor 53E1

matrix 32E1

processor 53E1

RIM

cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration

cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration

cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

85

With drop-insert configuration (only into 2RU, see Fig.58) it is possible to manage up to 4 directions radio
(full capacity) with the possibility to drop-insert freely the 2 Mbit/s streams arriving from the 4 directions
and from front panel according the capacity of the switch matrix (32E1).
For example with 32E1 the maximum drop-insert possibilities is 32 tributaries but total capacity is limited
by total capacity of 4 directions. If total capacity of 4 directions is less then 32E1 that is the drop-insert
limit.
Maximum capacity arriving from the 4 radios is with 4 link at 53E1 for a total of 212 E1. For any configuration the switch matrix is no blocking. A repeater can be done without activating local E1 ports.

ODU1A

ODU1B

ODU2A

RIM2A

RIM1A

RIM2B

RIM1B

Processor A

ODU2B

Processor B

LIM A

LIM B
53E1

53E1

53E1

53E1

Back Plane

or

Matrix with
32E1 front panel

Matrix with
STM1 front panel
21E1

32E1

Exp
53E1

16E1

NBUS
NBUS

STM1

STM1

21E1
Two redundant
STM1 interfaces
Fig.58 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure

86

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

12.9

NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)

Composition of nodal is similar to drop-insert (see Fig.57):


1

equipment controller

processor 53E1

1+0 matrix node STM1+16E1, 1+1 matrix STM-1 +16E1, 2x(1+0) matrix STM1 + 16E1

processor 53E1

RIM

cover or RIM

cover or RIM

cover or RIM

A node can be made up of up to 3 subracks of 2RU so that we can have up to 12 maximum independent
radio directions.
On the front panel of the STM1+16E1 matrix there are two NBUS ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to other one or two 2RU subracks as in Fig.59 and Fig.60.
The connection among the subracks are made by cables of CAT7 quality, SIAE code F03471 length 75 cm,
to insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel.
Each subrack must be defined as NodeA, NodeB or NodeC. The cables among the NBUS must be connected
only as in Fig.59 and Fig.60.
NBUS can operate in Protected modality or in Not Protected modality. Each NBUS carries 126 E1s. In case
of Not Protected modality, all the 126 E1s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the other for a
total amount of 252 E1 connections available on the NBUS.
In case of Protected modality, the unused connections, for example between node A (NBUS1) and node B
(NBUS1) are used as protection of the connections between node A (NBUS1) and node B (NBUS1); for
example 63 E1s are used between node A and node B and the other 63 E1s are used as protection of the
connections between node A and node C, the connections used as protection pass from node B in passthrough modality without need of programming.
Warning: for the best operation of the protected modality, it is necessary to choose the shortest path as
preferential connection; for example, for the connections between A and B choose the connections between
A and B as preferential; for the connection between A and C choose the connections between A and C as
preferential.
In case of protected modality, the system displays, by means of the SCT/LCT program in the cross-connection window, only the NBUS with 126 E1s (subdivided in two parts for a better graphic display). The
unused E1 ports are automatically programmed as pass-through between NBUS1 and NBUS2 but these
connections are not displayed in SCT/LCT.
In case of unprotected modality, the system displays, by means of the SCT/LCT program in the cross-connection window, the NBUS1 and NBUS2 buses each one with 126 E1 (subdivided in two parts for a better
graphic display).
The troubles in the connections between the NBUS buses are signalled by alarms.
In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.

12.9.1

Expansion from 2 to 3 nodes

Suppose that the nodes A and B already exist and that you must add the node C. Disconnect the cable
between NBUS2 node A and NBUS2 node B, the traffic is automatically switched to the other cable, if necessary.
By SCT/LCT, re-program the nodes A and B as nodes with 3 items.
By SCT/LCT, re-program the node C as nodeC, protected and define the node with 3 items.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

87

Connect the NBUS2 of the node A with NBUS1 of node C, connect the NBUS2 of the node B with NBUS2 of
the node C as in Fig.59.
Program the interested cross-connections between node A and node C and between node B and node C;
the unused connections are automatically assigned to the pass-through between node A and node B.
The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from C.

12.9.2

Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes

Suppose that the nodes A, B and C already exist and that the node C must be removed.
Delete all the cross-connections between the node C and the node A and between the node C and the node
B.
Remove the cables of the NBUS which go to node C.
Connect the node A NBUS2 to the node B NBUS2 as in Fig.60.
The same procedure can be used even if the deleted node is different from C.
In NMS5UX/LX the three nodes A, B, C are managed as a single equipment.

2RU
Node A
NBUS1

NBUS1

NBUS2

NBUS2

NBUS1

NBUS2

2RU
Node B

2RU
Node C

Fig.59 - Nodal connections in 3 subracks

2RU
NBUS1

NBUS2

NBUS1

NBUS2

2RU
Fig.60 - Nodal connections in 2 subracks

88

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

53E1
16E1

53E1

53E1

53E1

53E1

NODAL

NBUS

STM1
NBUS

NODAL

53E1

STM1

53E1

53E1

STM1 (1+0) or (1+0 MSP) or 2x(1+0)

16E1

NBUS

16E1

NODAL

53E1

53E1

53E1

53E1

Fig.61 - Nodal - 12 max radio directions, max 6xstm-1, max 48E1 all disconnecting, no blocking
For each subrack of the node, a maximum of 4 radio streams of 53E1 arrive, for a total of 212E1. Each
subrack can cross-connect, in no-locking mode, 212E1 (via radio) + 2x126E1 (via NBUS) + 16E1 (via SCSI
connector on the front side) + 2x63E1 (via STM-1) for a total of 606E1.
A node of 3 subracks with 2RU can cross-connect, in no-locking mode, up to 3x212E1 (via radio) + 3x16E1
(via SCSI connector on the front side) + 6x63E1 (via STM1) for a total of 1062E1 (see Fig.61).
The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization circuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node is distributed on the NBUS.
The SETS circuit can be seen as a single circuit which provides to the synchronization of the three subracks.
The SETS circuit can be disabled if only PDH interfaces are present in the node
For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
the connection via cable.
The switching criteria in Rx are:

Unequipped

LOS

LOF

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

89

MSAIS

TIM

B2 excessive BER

B2 degraded BER.

12.10 DYNAMIC MODULATION


During the period of bad propagation, the system changes modulation to increase the system gain keeping
constant the transmitted band, decreasing the transmitted capacity and increasing the availability of the
system for the privileged traffic.
With the dynamic modulation, about the half of the traffic is saved, without the dynamic modulation all the
traffic would be lost at the reaching of the BER threshold of 10-3.
The modulation switches from 32QAM to 4QAM or to 16QAM to 4QAM as in Tab.14.
Tab.14 - Capacity change
Modulation 16/32QAM from

Modulation 4QAM to

4x2 @ 16QAM

no dynamic modulation

5x2 @ 16QAM

no dynamic modulation

8x2 @ 16QAM

4x2 @ 4QAM

10x2 @ 16QAM

5x2 @ 4QAM

16x2 @ 16QAM

8x2 @ 4QAM

21x2 @ 16QAM

10x2 @ 4QAM

32x2 @ 16QAM

16x2 @ 4QAM

42x2 @ 16QAM

21x2 @ 4QAM

53x2 @ 32QAM

21x2 @ 4QAM

The reduction of the traffic capacity is communicated to NMS by means of the Reduced Capacity Alarm.

12.10.1

Capacity reduction

Conditions for the request of modulation change from 32/16QAM to 4QAM by the receiver with lower quality (B):
1

the PTx power of the transmitter A towards B has reached the maximum value with ATPC active and
Max PTx value set to the maximum value

the PRx power at the receiver B is lower than the ATPC Low Thresholds and then more power is
required to the transmitter

BER at the receiver B is lowest than 10-9.

For the restore of the modulation from 4QAM to 16/32QAM, the following conditions are necessary on both
sides:

90

the PTx power at 4QAM is equal to the maximum power possible for the modulation 16/32QAM

the ATPC circuit is not requiring the increase of the Tx power of the remote transmitter

no error is occurred in the last seconds (default: 10 seconds).

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Note: If maximum PTx at 4QAM is 20dBm and the maximum PTx at 16QAM is 15dBm then the difference
is 5dB the PTx Boost value can be from 0 to 5dB. If the ATPC values are not correct, the dynamic modulation is not activated.
The Performance Monitoring are reported as 16QAM. The AIS on the tributaries is not available.
The Upgrade of equipment already installed can be executed by means of the simple download from the
supervision network.

12.10.2

Setting with SCT/LCT

A green light signal shows that the dynamic modulation is active, the orange light signal signals that the
reduction of modulation is active: in this case the Reduced Capacity Alarm is active.
Warning: no configuration change must be made when the Dynamic Modulation is active. In detail, if a loop
must be executed, first deactivate the Dynamic Modulation.
PTx Boost: increase of PTx power with reduced modulation, default 5Db Receiving Hysteresis: number of
dB from the Prx level with BER 10-9, default 2dB.
Atpc Hysteresis for recovering: hysteresis of Atpc from the restore of 16QAM, default 0dB.
Recovering timeout: seconds with PRx level stable before the restore of the 16QAM modulation, default
10sec.
Tx power Overboost: increase of the Tx power of 3dB with 16QAM modulation. Enable only if allowed by
the laws of Your country.

12.11 LIM
The LIM performs the following operations:

multiplexing process of the input tributaries

aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit

processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM modulator takes place within the RIM)

duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level.

Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a chip set. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.

12.12 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION


Tx side
Refer to Fig.62.
The 2 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.
In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Equipment Controller module.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

91

The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation occurring at the bit rate depending on various versions implemented.
The aggregate frame contains:

the main signal from the MUX(s)

the framed service signal from the service MUX

the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

the frame alignment word

the bits dedicated to the FEC.

All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0
at 48 MHz
The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.62) of the modulating signal to be sent to the
mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM.
The digital process includes:

serial to parallel conversion

differential encoding

generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.

Rx side
Refer to Fig.63.
From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:

clock recovery

frequency and phase carrier locking

baseband equalisation and filtering

bit polarity decision

differential decoding

parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

BER estimate measurement

radio performances

HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken directly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.
The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.15.
The changeover is hitless and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic synchronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.

92

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.15 - Switching priority


Priority
Highest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Lowest

Levels

Description

Priority 1

RIM PSU Alarm

Priority 2

Manual forcing (from main controller)

Priority 3

Cable Short Alarm

Priority 3

Cable Open Alarm

Priority 3

IF Unit Alarm

Priority 3

Demodulator Failure

Priority 3

Base Band Unit Failure Alarm

Priority 3

ODU Unit Failure

Priority 3

ODU PSU Alarm

Priority 3

VCO Failure Alarm

Priority 3

High BER >103 (or 104 or 105, selectable by software)

Priority 4

Low BER > 106 (or 107 or 108, selectable by software)

Priority 5

Early Warning BER > 109 (or 1010 or 1011 or 1012, selectable by software)

Priority 6

RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99


dBm)

Priority 7

CRC Pulse

Priority 8

Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)

12.13 RIM
Refer to Fig.64.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

IF part of the QAM modulator

IF part of the QAM demodulator

power supply

telemetry IDU/ODU

There are two types of RIM according to modulation capability:

4QAM/16QAM or

4QAM/16QAM/32QAM

Inside the RIM, behind the front panel, the is a fuse for protection to whole IDU. It is a soldering type fuse.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

93

12.13.1

QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4/16/32QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits:

recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

330 MHz local oscillator

a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers

a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

12.13.2

QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM demodulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

12.13.3

Power supply

The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.
The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable.
An electronic breaker protects the module and the battery against cable failure. Protections are automatically restored. Overcurrent or missing current on IDU-ODU cable are detected by Cable short and Cable
open alarm.

12.13.4

Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

12.14 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER


The Equipment Controller module performs the following:

94

interfaces the service signals

houses the equipment software for equipment management

interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

12.14.1

Service signals

The Equipment Controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

2 Mbit/s wayside G.703 (not available in no-hierarchical configurations).

The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.

12.14.2

Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.65.

Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:

Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.66 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
-

LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

USB port for 1+0 version

RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection (if USB connector is not used) or with other
NE

EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.

Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

95

Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of activating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

12.14.3

Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:

LCT (USB) and RS232 interface with PPP protocol

LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols; two LAN interfaces are connected with a all-pass
switch

EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the supervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

12.15 IDU LOOPS


To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.67.

12.15.1

Tributary loop

Tributary local loop


Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop


Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

12.15.2

Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

96

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

12.15.3

IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connected to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.

12.16 EXPANSION 53E1


This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1 to provide the interfaces necessary
to connect up to 53E1.

12.17 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER


This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1.
This board gives the interface to service channels CH1 and CH2 plus 2 Mbit/s wayside channel. To be used
when there are no matrix and no expansion 53E1.

12.18 PROCESSOR 53E1


The 53E1 processor has the same functionnality of LIM but doesnt have the front panel connector because
all 53E1 are sent to Matrix.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

97

Fig.62 - LIM block diagram - Tx side

98

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

CK

NRZ

NRZ
Code
converter CK

NRZ

services

Controller
module

Service
channel
module

MUX
2x2/4x2
8x2/16x2
Code
converter CK 32x2/5x2
10x2/21x2
42x2/53x2
Mbit/s

Code
converter

2 Mbit/s only (16x2 or


wayside higher speed

nx2
.
.
.
nx34

2/34 Mbit/s
G.703

synchr.

Frame
generator

BI:
- main traffic
- services
- EOC
- FEC
- FAW

to/from main
controller

- FSK mod/demod
- 388 frame
generator/receiver

X0 48 MHz

Digital MOD
- S/P convertion
- diff. encoding
- modulating
signal
generation
D/A

I&Q

D/A I&Q

to RIM2

to RIM1

Fig.63 - LIM block diagram - Rx side

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

99

I&Q from
RIM2

I&Q
from
RIM1

same as
above

Ck recovery
Carrier lock
Equaliz. & filt.
Decision
Diff. decod.
S/P

BER extimates
High BER
Low BER
EW

CRC
analysis
& aligner

from
main
P

switch
controls

SW
logic

FEC

BE

BER meas.
P.M.

Service
channel
DEMUX

DEMUX
2x2/4x2
8x2/16x2
32x2/5x2
10x2/21x2
42x2/53x2
Mbit/s

Controller
module

Code
converter

Code
converter

Code
converter

Services

nx2
Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s
G.703

Fig.64 - RIM block diagram

100

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


to LIM

battery
-48 V

from LIM

I&Q

I&Q

DEM
QAM
(IF part)

17.5 MHz

5.5 MHz

330 MHz

DC

Cable
equaliz.

DC

Remote power supply

Overcurrent
protect.

from LIM

to LIM

QAM
MOD
(IF part)

Step
down

I/V
protect

-5 V

+3.6 V

Cable
interface

ODU1

ODU2

Peripheral
controller
338 kb/s
gen/rec.
Peripheral
controller

388 kb/s
gen/rec.

FSK
modem

FSK
modem

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver

388 kbit/s

FSK
modem

FSK
modem

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver
Main controller

388 kbit/s

EOC
Alarm/
User Out
User In
LCT
RS232
LAN
USB

Fig.65 - Main and peripheral controller connection

APPLICATION

SOFTWARE

Applic./present.
session layers

SNMP

Transport
layer

TCP/UDP

IPoverOSI

Routing
layer

IP

IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link
layer

PPP

PPP

LLC
MAC

LAPD
Q921

LCC
MAC

Physical
layer

RS232

EOC

Ethernet
LAN

EOC

Ethernet
LAN

Fig.66 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

101

Fig.67 - IDU loopback

102

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Trib. loc. loop

Trib. OUT

Trib. IN
Trib. rem.
loop

LIM

DEMUX

MUX

BE

BI

DEM

140

330

BB loop

MOD

RIM

from ODU

140 MHz

IDU loop

330 MHz
to ODU

13

DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT PLUS FOR


2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES AND ETHERNET TRAFFIC

13.1

IDU COMPACT PLUS ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 VERSION

The IDU Compact Plus can be provided with optional Ethernet tributary interface. In this way, the equipment has both 2 Mbit/s ports and the Ethernet ports, and the bit rate assigned to the Ethernet traffic is the
rated capacity of the radio decreased by the enabled tributaries.
The IDU Compact Plus is equipped with the following interfaces:

3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT IEEE 802.3 electrical interfaces

32 2Mbit/s (32xE1) interfaces.

For the description of the processing of the 2Mbit/s signals, refer to the description of the IDU Plus.
For the description of the processing of the Ethernet signals, refer to the description of the IDU Modular
Ethernet.
The IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet tributary is realized in terminal configuration.
The transmission capacity is displayed in Tab.16.
Tab.16 - Transmission capacity of the IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet
64 Mbit/s

2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT

1+0/1+1

105 Mbit/s

2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT

1+0/1+1

V11

Trib. 17-24

RS232

Trib. 25-32

DPX
2

3
ACT LINK

1
Q3/2

Q3/1

LCT

USER IN/OUT

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

M 3.15A 250VAC

PS
1
2
1
48VDC

2
2
48VDC

TX RX
1
2

TEST
R AL

10/100 BaseT

M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.68 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

103

14

DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR E/W


REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT

14.1

GENERAL

Description that follows covers indoor unit for East/West repeater with Ring Protection.
Paragraph 14.2 COMPOSITION deals with unit composition because number and type of modules are different respect a standard IDU.
Paragraph 14.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS deals with an explanation of unit block diagrams and with a description of functions performed by each module.

14.2

COMPOSITION

Indoor unit for East/West repeater with Drop/Insert functionalities is made up with the following modules:
-

D1205202

Processor unit (2: East, West)

D12089

Crossconnection matrix

D12094

Controller

D12037

RIM (2: East, West)

D12052-02

D12037

D12089

RIM1
RIM2

FAIL

East

RIM1
RIM2

FAIL
1

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

West

FAIL
IDUODU TX RX
Q3

LCT

RS232

USER IN/OUT

WAY
SIDE

A
REMTEST

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

D12094
Fig.69 - IDU for E/W repeater

104

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

14.3

IDU CHARACTERISTICS

14.3.1

Management of tributaries

A 2 Mbit/s tributary can be managed by cross connection matrix in different ways:

Ring Protection A tributary is inserted (transmitted) in radio aggregate frame towards both direction and can be dropped (received) from one direction or from the other depending on cross connection and E1 switch criteria

Pass through IDU works as repeater, tributary coming from one direction is sent to the other

Loop E1 accessing the matrix from East side or West side can be looped back towards its origin.

14.3.2

Capacity

IDU max capacity depends on modulation used:

16QAM max capacity is 32x2 Mbit/s with maximum 16 tributaries with protected connections
(Drop/Insert). Lower capacity can be set.

4QAM max capacity is 16x2 Mbit/s and in this configuration all tributaries can be set in DropInsert
or in Pass through (in this last configuration the three sides of the matrix have the same capacity:
16x2 Mbit/s). Lower capacity can be set.

System can work with one branch capacity different than the other.

14.3.3

E1 switching criteria

In network configuration where thus East/West repeater IDU is employed as a Ring Protection, where a
direction protects the other on the opposite direction, the E1 drop can be managed through suitable E1
switching criteria:
1

Manual forcing

2 Mbit/s G.704 alarms (AIS, OOF, OOMF, BER6) where:

14.4

AIS: presence of AIS

OOF: out of E1 frame

OOMF: out of E1 multiframe

BER6: BER = 106

Preferential.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Description that follows is referring to MATRIX/PROCESSOR/CONTROLLER/RIM module the IDU consists of.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

105

14.4.1

Matrix

Matrix module presents on front panel the 2 Mbit/s connectors and contains the sixteen relevant electrical
interface and the cross connection matrix.
The matrix allows connections of 2 Mbit/s streams with following capacities and directions:

east side 32x2 Mbit/s, subdivided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a
34368 kbit aggregate

west side 32x2 Mbit/s, subdivided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a
34368 kbit aggregate

towards front panel 16x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm.

Function performed by matrix module are the following:

code conversion of 2 Mbit/s streams in input and output (for Drop/Insert operations)

tributary transit between East and West

tributary transit towards one or both directions, in position not involved in tributary transit

tributary drop from East or West or from one of them using appropriate switching criteria.

Tributaries cross connected by matrix are sent and received to/from East and/or West processor module,
depending on their direction and connection.
Hitless Rx switch between 2 Mbit/s streams, coming from East and West, can work with relative delay up
to 7 ms.

14.4.2

Processor

Operations performed by processor module depend on selected capacity and modulation.

Tx side

32x2 Mbit/s (available in 16QAM only) processor module receives from matrix 32 tributaries, the
first sixteen one by one and the second sixteen inside a 34368 kbit/s aggregate. The first sixteen
tributaries, in MUX block, are grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In
this way two aggregates at 34368 kbit/s are sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I.
After B.I. signal at 77760 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

16x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from Matrix 16 tributaries. The sixteen tributaries are
grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In this way the aggregate at 34368
kbit/s is sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent
to the B.I. After B.I. signal at 38880 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

8x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 8 tributaries. These are grouped in two 4x2
Mbit/s groups generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After
B.I. signal at 19440 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

4x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 4 tributaries. These are grouped in one 4x2
Mbit/s group generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After
B.I. signal at 9720 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

2x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 2 tributaries. These are grouped in a proprietary frame and sent to the Bit Insertion. After B.I. signal at 4860 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

An additional Service Mux/Demux is provided to aggregate various service signal interfaces by Controller
module. Achieved stream is sent to BI/BE to obtain the aggregate frame (various bit rate depending on
capacity set) for block MOD/DEMOD.
This aggregate frame contains:

106

main signal from MUX and from MATRIX

aggregate signal from service MUX

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

EOC signal for supervision towards remote equipment

Frame Alignment Word

Bits dedicated to FEC.

Processor also includes digital process of modulating signal to be sent to the mixer of QAM modulator inside
RIM. The digital process includes:

serial to parallel conversion

differential encoding

generation of shaped modulating signal I and Q towards the RIM module.

Rx side
From connected RIM, Processor module receives I and Q analogue signals, converts them in digital form
and performs:

clock recovery

frequency and phase carrier locking

baseband equalisation and filtering

bit decision

differential decoding

parallel to serial conversion to recover aggregate signal.

Aggregate signal is sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and after to error corrector block
(FEC). Errors are properly counted to achieve:

BER estimate measurement

Radio performances.

HBER alarm is used to insert AIS in Rx signal.


Achieved signal is sent to Bit Ex circuit that, depending on capacity and modulation, performs in opposite
way the operations mentioned in Tx side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

107

Fig.70 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix

108

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Main traffic + services


EOC
FEC
FAW

(17...32)

34368 kbit/s

MATRIX

...
Tributary interfaces
16

D/A

MUX/DEMUX
16x2
WEST

Aggregate CK

- FSK mod
- 388 kbit/s

From
controller

5.5 MHz 17.5 MHz

34368 kbit/s

Main traffic + services


EOC
FEC
FAW

Bit In/Bit Ex

77760 kbit/s

- S/P conversion
- Differ. Encode/Decode
- Modulation/Demodulation
with CRC and FEC

Digital MOD/DEMOD

to/from RIM WEST

34368 kbit/s

From
service
channel
interface

- E1 in Pass through
- E1 with protected connection

Aggregate CK

From
controller

17.5 MHz

- FSK mod
- 388 kbit/s

5.5 MHz

(1...16) 16x2 Mbit/s

MUX/DEMUX
16x2

34368 kbit/s

Bit In/Bit Ex

77760 kbit/s

- S/P conversion
- Differ. Encode/Decode
- Modulation/Demodulation
with CRC and FEC

EAST

From
service
channel
interface

D/A

Digital MOD/DEMOD

to/from RIM EAST

14.4.3

RIM

Refer to Fig.71.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

IF part of the QAM modulator

IF part of the QAM demodulator

power supply

telemetry IDU/ODU

14.4.3.1

QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits:

recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

330 MHz local oscillator

a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers

a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

14.4.3.2

QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM demodulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

14.4.3.3

Power supply

The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.
The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

14.4.3.4

Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

109

14.4.4

CONTROLLER

The controller module performs the following:

interfaces the service signals

houses the equipment software for equipment management

interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

14.4.4.1

Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.

The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.

14.4.4.2

Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.72.

Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:

110

Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.73 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
-

LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

USB asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection

RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs or for SCT/LCT connection

EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.

Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of activating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

14.4.4.3

Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:

LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600

LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols

EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the supervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

14.5

IDU LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.74.

14.5.1

Tributary loop

Tributary local loop


Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop


Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

14.5.2

Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

111

14.5.3

IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connected to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.

East side or West side tributary loop

-5 V

+3.6 V

Cable
equaliz.

DC

Step
down

I/V
protect
DC

to LIM

battery
-48 V

from LIM

I&Q

I&Q

DEM
QAM
(IF part)

Overcurrent
protect.

Remote power supply

17.5 MHz
from LIM

5.5 MHz
to LIM

QAM
MOD
(IF part)

330 MHz

Cable
interface

Tributaries, accessing the matrix from East side or West side, not assigned nor in a Transit nor in a cross
connection, can be looped back towards their direction of origin.

Fig.71 - RIM block diagram

112

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.72 - Main and peripheral controller connection

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

113

Peripheral
controller

ODU1

388 kb/s
gen/rec.

388 kbit/s

gen/rec.

338 kb/s

388 kbit/s

FSK
modem

FSK
modem

Alarm/
User Out

FSK
modem

User In

FSK
modem

Main controller

LCT

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver

RS232

388 kbit/s
generator
receiver

LAN

ODU2

Peripheral
controller

EOC

APPLICATION

SOFTWARE

Applic./present.
session layers

SNMP

Transport
layer

TCP/UDP

IPoverOSI

Routing
layer

IP

IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link
layer

PPP

PPP

LLC
MAC

LAPD
Q921

LCC
MAC

Physical
layer

RS232

EOC

Ethernet
LAN

EOC

Ethernet
LAN

Fig.73 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

114

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

EAST ODU

MOD/
DEM

Baseband
loop
BI/BE

East side

West side

32
.
.
.
.
.
1

East side trib. loops

PROCESSOR

RIM

IDU
loop

MATRIX

Remote loop

Remote loop
..........

Local loop

Local loop
1 Tributary 16

Fig.74 - IDU E/W loops

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

115

15

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT

15.1

GENERAL

The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS.


AS ODU is also called Universal ODU because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH).
The following ODU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from 33 C to +55 C.

15.2

116

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Output power at the antenna side

Tuning range

see Tab.17

AL4

45.5 MHz

AL7

42 MHz (154 MHz go-return)


56 MHz (161/168/196 MHz go-return)
94 MHz (245 MHz go-return)

AL8

42 MHz (119 and 126 MHz go-return)


112 MHz (310 MHz go-return)
120 MHz (311,32 MHz go-return)
91 MHz (266 MHz go-return)
94.5 MHz (274 MHz go-return)

AL13

84 MHz

AL15

84 MHz (315/322 MHz go-return


119 MHz (420/490/728 MHz go-return)

AL18

330 MHz

AL23

336 MHz

AL25/AL28

448 MHz

AL32

252/280 MHz

AL38

560 MHz

RF frequency agility

Duplex spacing

125 kHz step

AL4

100 MHz

AL7

154/161/168/196/245 MHz

AL8

311,32 MHz

AL11

490/530 MHz

AL13

266 MHz

AL15

315/322/420/490/728 MHz

AL18

1010 MHz

AL23

1008/1232 MHz

AL25

1008 MHz

AL28

1008 MHz

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

AL32

812 MHz

AL38

1260 MHz

ATPC dynamic range

40 dB

Transmit power attenuation range

40 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable

Transmitter shutdown

40 dB

Antenna side flange


-

AL4

N female connector

AL7/8

UBR84 (with separated antenna)

AL11

UBR100

AL13

UDR120 or PDR120 with 90 rigid elbow

AL15

UDR140 or PDR140 with 90 rigid elbow

AL18/23/25

UBR220 or PBR220 with 90 rigid elbow

AL28/32/38

UBR320 or PBR320 with 90 rigid elbow

AGC dynamic range

from 20 dBm to threshold corresponding


to BER103

Accuracy of Rx level indication (PC reading)

3 dB from 50 dBm to threshold


4 dB from 49 dBm to 20 dBm

Maximum input level for BER 103

20 dBm

Type of connector at the cable interface side

Signals at the cable interface

QAM modulated carrier

330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)


140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

Telemetry

388 kbit/s

Telemetry carriers

17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)


5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

Available loops

RF loop

Tab.17 - Nominal output power (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU (1 dB tolerance)


GHz
4

Output power
16QAM

Output power
32QAM

+29 dBm

+24 dBm

+22 dBm

+27/29 dBm

+22/26 dBm

+20/26 dBm

+27/29 dBm

+22/26 dBm

+20/26 dBm

11

+25/28 dBm

+20/25 dBm

+20/25 dBm

13

+25/28 dBm

+20/25 dBm

+20/25 dBm

15

+25/28 dBm

+20/25 dBm

+20/25 dBm

18

+20/23 dBm

+15/21 dBm

+15/21 dBm

23

+20/23 dBm

+15/21 dBm

+15/21 dBm

25

+20/23 dBm

+15/20 dBm

+15/20 dBm

28

+19/22 dBm

+14/19 dBm

+14/19 dBm

32

a.

38
a.

Output power
4QAM

+17 dBm

+13 dBm

+13 dBm

+17/20 dBm

+13/17 dBm

+13/17 dBm

Only ODU AL

Note
In 1+1 hot standby version the output power decreases by the following values:

4 dB 0.5 dB (balanced hybrid)

1.7/7 dB 0.3 dB (unbalanced hybrid)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

117

16

OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION

16.1

GENERAL

The 1+0 ODU (refer to Fig.75 or to Fig.77) consists of a two shell aluminium mechanical structure, one
shell housing all the ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate.
On the ODU are accessible:

the N type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU

the BNC connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field
strength

a ground bolt.

The 1+1 hot standby version (refer to Fig.76) consist of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a structure housing the hybrid for the antenna connection.
ODU exists in two different versions, AL and AS. They differs about dimensions and output power.
AS ODU is also called Universal because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH).

16.2

TRANSMIT SECTION

Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.78.


The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 16.4 CABLE INTERFACE) is forwarded to a mixer passing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz.
The mixer and the following bandpass filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which depends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type.
The IF Tx frequency is P controlled. Same happens to Rx IF and RF local oscillators. This latter is common
to both Tx and Rx sides.
The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is
SSB type with side band selection.
The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated by 40 dB, 1 dB step.
Total attenuation is 40 dB including the 20 dB attenuator that follows.
The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 16.5 ATPC OPERATION for
details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a feedback
including the AGC.
Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC passes through the following circuits:

a decoupler plus detector diode to measure the output power

a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.

a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation

an RF bandpass filter for antenna coupling.

An RF coupler plus a detector and a shift oscillator made up the RF loop which is enabled upon receiving a
P control. The RF loop permits the Tx power to return back to receive side thus controlling the total local
radio terminal performance.

118

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

16.3

RECEIVE SECTION

The RF signal from the Rx bandpass filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sensitivity. The following downconverter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conversion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a P control.
A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU.
The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to 5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled,
distributed in the IF chain. In addition the AGC gives a measure of the receive RF level.
Between two amplifiers a bandpass filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW
type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.

16.4

CABLE INTERFACE

The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa.
It receives/transmits the following signals:

330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

remote power supply.

The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two
388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequency, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the
ODU. The ODU management is made by a P.

16.5

ATPC OPERATION

The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at
the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The
difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.81) due to the increase of the
hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a
control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB.
If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP
causes the output power to decrease.

16.6

1+1 Tx SYSTEM

The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid.
1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.79 and
Fig.80.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

119

The transmitter switchover is electromechanical type and consists of two ON/OFF switches within the two
ODUs that assure at least 40 dB insulation on the standby transmitter.
Transmit alarm priority is shown in Tab.18.
Tab.18 - Transmit alarm priority
Priority

Highest

Lowest

16.7

Levels

Definition

Priority 1

RIM PSU Alarm

Priority 2

Manual forcing

Priority 3

Cable Short Alarm

Priority 3

Cable Open Alarm

Priority 3

Modulator Failure

Priority 3

ODU Unit Failure Alarm

Priority 3

VCO Failure Alarm

Priority 3

IF Unit Alarm

Priority 3

ODU PSU Alarm

Priority 3

Tx Power Low Alarm

Priority 4

Request from remote terminal (both receivers alarmed)

Priority 5

Revertive Tx (branch one preferential)

POWER SUPPLY

The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate
three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry:

+3.5 V

a voltage comprised between +6.2 V and +8.2 V to power MMIC amplifiers operating at different
frequency bands

a 12 V through an inverter circuit.

Each voltage is protected against overcurrent with automatic restart.


Protection against overvoltage occurs as soon as the output voltage raises more than 15% respect to the
nominal voltage. The restart is automatic.

120

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
Fig.75 - 1+0 AL ODU

Fig.76 - 1+1 AL ODU

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

121

Fig.77 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version

122

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.78 - ODU block diagram (both versions)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

123

PRx
meas.

BNC

N type

PRx meas

AGC

-12 V

DEM
17.5
MHz

ctrl

variable bw
(capacity
depending)

388
kbit/s

MUX
DEMUX

Alarm
manag
&
control

+6.2 to 8.2 V

+3.5 V

Cable
equaliz.

388
kbit/s

INV

Step
up

140
MHz

REC
17.5
MHz

MOD
5.5
5.5
MHz MHz

17.5
MHz

Cable
interface

-48 V

330
MHz

DC

DC

140
MHz

Alm
comm
loops
ctrl

Rx

LO
IF
unit

Tx

approx.
765
MHz

ctrl

IF Tx

AGC

PTx att.
control
0 to 40 dB

Tx

Rx

RF LO
unit

MMIC

LNA

ctrl

RF
loop

antenna
side

Tx side
SW control

Rx side
Antenna
side
Tx side
SW control

Rx side

Fig.79 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna

Tx side
SW control

First
antenna

Rx side

Tx side
SW control
Second
antenna
Rx side

Fig.80 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas

124

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Remote PRx
dBm

Local
Thresh High

Remote
Rx

Tx

PRx recording
level

PTx actuation
Thresh Low
P

P
PTx control
Transmission

Rx

Tx

of PTx control

Hop attenuation (dB)


Local PTx
dBm

PTx max.

40 dB
ATPC range
PTx min.

Hop attenuation (dB)

Fig.81 - ATPC operation

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

125

17

24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089

17.1

GENERAL

The 24/48V DC/DC converter D52089 is a unit which converts the voltage of 24 Vdc in 48 Vdc.
This unit is housed in a subrack 1 RU unit G52004 with two D52089 units (1+1 version). For 1+0 version
the subrack is G52003 with one D52089 unit and the remaining half front panel has a cover.
These subracks have a free air gap for cooling purpose.
The DC/DC converter unit D52089 is shown in Fig.82.
Fuse 6.3 A

Green LED

24Vdc
IN

ON

M6,3A
250V

24 Vdc input male 3W3 connector

ALARM
48Vdc
OUT
2A

48 Vdc output female 3W3 connector

CM2 connector

Fig.82 - DC/DC converter front coverplate

17.2
-

Operational range

-10 50 C

Storage range

-40 80 C

Operational humidity

90% max in the range -5 30 C

17.3

126

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Vinput

24 Vdc (20.4 28.8 Vdc floating)

Voutput

52 Vdc

Max current in input

4.5 A

Max 24 Vdc consumption

90 W

Max 48 Vdc load

75 W

Secondary voltage ripple

200 mVpp

Surge current (Inrush current)

ETS 300 132-2

Conducted immunity

ETS 300 132-2

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Conducted emission

ETS 300 132-2

Short duration voltage transient

ETS 300 132-2 (ETR 283)

Abnormal service voltage

ETS 300 132-2

Voltage changes due to the regulation


of power supply

ETS 300 132-2

Electromagnetic compatibility

EN 300 086

Safety

EN 60950-1

Protections against

- input polarity inversion (fuse)


- surge input current (fuse)
- continuous short circuit at output with automatic
recovery

Visual indication

ON = green led active on input primary voltage


present

Alarm (CM2 connector)

with relay contact on 9 pin male SUBD connector


Alarm off: 89 pin open, 79 pin closed
Alarm on when Vout decreases 15%: 89 pin
closed, 79 pin open

Fuse

6.3 A medium time 250 Volt

Fig.83 shows, as example, connection from IDU 1+0 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cable
F03489.
Fig.84 shows, as example, connections from IDU 1+1 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cables
F03489 and F03278.
Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN.
Warning: power supply from 48 Vdc must be connected directly to ALC IDU.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

127

AL

Q3

LCT

USER IN/OUT

Trib. 5678

Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN

TEST

Trib. 1234

6,3A
M
250V

Fuse 6.3 A

ON

48V

PS

IN
24Vdc

24 Vdc IN

G52003

F03489

128
+
+

Fig.83 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

2A
OUT
48Vdc

ALARM

AL

TX RX

Q3

LCT
USER IN/OUT

24Vdc
IN

Trib. 5678

Trib. 1234

48Vdc
2A
OUT

Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN

TEST

ON

6,3A
M
250V

24 Vdc IN

ALARM

Trib. 13141516

Trib. 9101112

6,3A
M
250V

Fuse 6.3 A

F03278

ON

48V1

PS2

PS1

24Vdc
IN

24 Vdc IN

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fuse 6.3 A

48V2

Fig.84 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1

129

F03489

48Vdc
OUT
2A

ALARM

130

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 3.
INSTALLATION

18

INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

18.1

GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION

ALS equipment is a split mount (indoor-outdoor) PDH/SDH radio link system operating in the frequency
ranges 4, 6, 7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz, for low, medium and high transport capacity (from
4 up to 622 Mbit/s), designed to establish LAN-LAN connections and PDH/SDH access. For the details related to the actual used frequency band refer to the label on the equipment.
The system is provided with an integral antenna; however, in case its antenna is not used, it should be
connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequency band.
The equipment is composed by the following separate units:

radio unit (outdoor) with or without integral antenna

Baseband (indoor)

This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.


Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.
The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regulation
for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.
The symbol
indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate collection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more
information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

131

18.2

GENERAL

The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19 subrack (IDU)
and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate cardboard box.
After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the
following paragraphs.

18.3

18.3.1

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

IDU installation

On their sides the subracks making up the several IDU versions are provided with two holes for the M6
screws fastening the subracks to a rack or to a 19 mechanical structure. The front of the IDU mechanical
structure is provided with the holes at the sides. This permits to fasten the subrack to a 19 rack by means
of 4 M6 screws.

18.3.2

1RU IDU installation

To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above a 1RU IDU must be 44 mm (1RU)
minimum.

18.3.3

2RU IDU installation

To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above a 2RU IDU must be 44 mm (1RU)
minimum.
Nodal and Drop/Insert compositions need the use of D12148-03 controller. In case of different compositions it is necessary to have 88 mm (2RU) free space below and above the 2RU IDU.

18.4

ELECTRICAL WIRING

The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pinout of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
Tab.19 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.

132

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.19 - Characteristics of the cables


Interconnecting points

Type of connector terminating


Type of cable/conductor
the cable

Battery

Polarized SUBD 3W3 female con- Section of each wire 2.5


nector
sq.mm a

1.0/2.3 male connector

75 ohm coaxial cable with


double shield diameter 4.5
mm dielectric in expanded
polyethylene type 2YCC
0.4/2.5 or equivalent
Alternatively to the above
option, 75 ohm coaxial cable with double shield, diameter 3.1 mm dielectric in
Teflon type RG179 B/U DS
or equivalent

Tributary signals

25 pin SUBD male connector

120 Ohm balanced four


symmetric pairs with shield
75 Ohm unbalanced four
coaxial cable pairs with the
shield connect to ground
pin (see 19 MODULAR IDU
USER CONNECTIONS document for pin details)

Tributary signals

SCSI 50 pin male connector


(IDU Plus)

8 conductor cable different


for 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm
signals

User input/alarm output

Female type D connector with 9


pins and shielded holder

9 conductor cable with


double brass sheath type
interconductor DB28.25 or
equivalent

LCT/RS232

Female type D connector with 9


pins and shielded holder

9 conductor cable with


double brass sheath type
interconductor DB 28.10 or
equivalent

GND

Faston male type

Section area 6 sq. mm.

Tributary signals

a.

For power cable length longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm is required.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

133

18.5

CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS

During the final installation, the IDU must be protected by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with
the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one's country.
The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the connector SUB-D 3W3 from the IDU.

18.6

GROUNDING CONNECTION

Fig.85 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.

Indoor

ODU
unit
1

IDU
unit

(+) (-)

Station
ground

Local
ground

ground
rack

Legend
1

IDU grounding point, faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq. mm. The
faston is available on the IDU both sides.

ODU grounding bolt. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16 sq. mm

IDUODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4 terminated with Ntype male connectors at
both sides.

Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable.

Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA or BNT male and N female connectors.

Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m.

Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be 16 sq. mm
Fig.85 - Grounding connection

134

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

19

MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS

19.1

CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR VERSION

The user connections are performed through connectors on LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules.


The connectors are the following:

LIM module 16x2 Mbit/s (see Fig.86)


-

Trib IN/OUT: connectors 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm type or SUBD 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120
Ohm type. For SUBD connector details refer to Tab.20.

LIM module 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT (see Fig.87)


-

Trib IN/OUT: connectors 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm type or SUBD 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120
Ohm type. For SUBD connector details refer to Tab.20.

10/100BaseT Ethernet: RJ45 connector.

Controller module
-

LCT:
RS232 type: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail refer to Tab.22.
USB type connector B receptable. For connector detail refer to USB standard.

USER IN/OUT: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector details refer to Tab.28.

RS232: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail see Tab.23.

Q3: connector or micro SUBD 15 pins and RJ45. For SUBD and RJ45 connector details refer
to Tab.21.

CH1/CH2: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.25 and Tab.26.

2 Mbit/s: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.27.

RIM module
-

connector TNC50 Ohm for interconnection to ODU

connector SUBD, 3 pins for interconnection to battery.

LIM module 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT (see Fig.88)


-

Trib IN/OUT: connectors SCSI female 50 pins 75 Ohm type and 120 Ohm. For details refer to
Tab.36

10/100BaseT Ethernet: RJ45 connector.

LIM

RIM

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

Trib: A-B-C-D

Trib: E-F-G-H

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

RIM 1
RIM 2

FAIL

USER IN/OUT

RS232

REM TEST

Q3
LCT

Trib: M-N-O-P

Trib: I-J-K-L
IDU ODU
A
R

TX RX
1
2

RIM1

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

RIM2

RIM
CONTROLLER

Fig.86 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

135

DPLX

FAIL

IDU ODU

WAY
SIDE

1
2

TEST REM

RS232

RIM 1
RIM 2

10/100 BTX

TX RX

Q3
USER IN/OUT

LCT

ACT
LINK

ACT
LINK

DPLX

DPLX

ACT
LINK

CH2

CH1

2 Mbit/s

RIM 1
RIM 2

Fig.87 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT

10-100 BaseT

DPX

48V
RIM 1

IDU ODU
A
R

2
TX RX
1

Q3
LCT

RS232

USER IN/OUT

LINK ACT

48V

2
REM TEST

RIM 2

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

RIM 1

FAIL
Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

RIM 2

Fig.88 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT

19.2

MODULAR VERSION CONNECTORS


Tab.20 - Tributary connector pinout (Sub-D 25 pin male)

136

75 Ohm impedance

Pin

120 Ohm impedance

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire)

Ground

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire)

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input

14

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground)

Ground

15

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire)

Ground

16

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire)

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground)

Ground

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire)

Ground

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire)

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input

17

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground)

Ground

18

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire)

Ground

19

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire)

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground)

Ground

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire)

Ground

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire)

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input

20

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground)

Ground

21

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire)

Ground

22

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire)

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground)

Ground

10

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire)

Ground

11

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire)

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input

23

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground)

Ground

24

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire)

Ground

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

25

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire)

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output

12

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground)

Ground

13

Ground

Ground

a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pinout is referred to the flying connectors to be
connected to the equipment connectors.
Tab.21 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description (RJ45)
Pin

Description

Tx+

Tx

Rx+

Rx

Tab.22 - LCT connector pinout for connection to supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male)
Pin

Description

RxD

TxD

GND

Tab.23 - RSR232 connector pinout for supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Pin

Description

Not connected

Rx D (IN)

Tx D (OUT)

Not connected

GND

6/7/8/9

--

137

Tab.24 - CH1 connector pinout for 9600 bit/s V.24 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description

CKTx

TD

DTR

DSR

GND

RD9600

CKRx

DCD

Tab.25 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description

TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)

TD (2 ch 4800)

GND

RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)

RD (2 ch 4800)

Tab.26 - CH2 connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45)

138

Pin

Description

DV11Tx

D+V11Tx

CV11Tx

C+V11Tx

DV11Rx

D+V11Rx

CV11Rx

C+V11Rx

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.27 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pinout (RJ45)


Pin

Description

TxC

TxF

GND

RxC

RxF

GND

Tab.28 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside
(Sub-D 9 pin male)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Pin

Description

C relay contact branch 1

NA/NC relay contact branch 1

C relay contact branch 2

NA/NC relay contact branch 2

User input 01

User input 02

User input 03

User input 04

GND

139

20

IDU COMPACT USER CONNECTIONS

20.1

CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 COMPACT VERSION

User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules (see Fig.89). The connectors are the following:

Trib IN/OUT: 75 or 120 25pin SUBD male connector. For SUBD connector details Fig.89.

LCT: USB connector B type "Receptacle". For connector detail see USB standard.

USER IN/OUT: SUBD male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.34.

Q3: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.30.

50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU1.

48V: 3 pin SUBD 3W3 connector for interconnection to battery.

V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.31.

V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.32.

RS232 PPP: optional management interface. Connector details in Tab.33.

Trib. 1234

Q3

LCT

Trib. 9101112

48V2

48V1

USER IN/OUT

PS1

TX RX
TEST
R AL

1
2

PS2

Trib. 13141516

Trib. 5678

Fig.89 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)

140

SMA kind: max torque 0.5 Nm

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.29 - Tributary connector pinout (male 25 pin SUBD)


Pin

75 Ohm impedancea

Pin

120 Ohm impedance

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire)

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire)

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input

14

Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground)

14

Ground

15

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire)

15

Ground

16

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire)

16

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output

Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground)

Ground

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire)

Ground

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire)

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input

17

Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground)

17

Ground

18

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire)

18

Ground

19

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire)

19

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output

Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground)

Ground

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire)

Ground

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire)

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input

20

Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground)

20

Ground

21

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire)

21

Ground

22

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire)

22

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output

Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground)

Ground

10

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire)

10

Ground

11

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire)

11

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input

23

Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground)

23

Ground

24

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire)

24

Ground

25

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire)

25

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output

12

Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground)

12

Ground

13

Ground

13

Ground

Ground

a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pinout is referred to the flying connectors to be connected
to the equipment connectors.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

141

Tab.30 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)


Pin

Description

Tx+

Tx-

Rx+

--

--

Rx-

--

--

Tab.31 - S.C. connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description

D-V11-Tx

D+V11-Tx

C-V11-Tx

C+V11-Tx

D-V11-Rx

D+V11-Rx

C-V11-Rx

C+V11-Rx

Tab.32 - S.C. connector pinout V.28 interface (RJ45)

142

Pin

Description

RTS

TD

DTR

DSR

GND

RD

CTS

DCD

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.33 - Connector pinout RS232 PPP interface (Sub-D 9 pin male)


Pin

Description

DCD

RD

TD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

Tab.34 - User in/out connector pinout (Sub-D 9 pin male)


Pin

Description

relay contact

NA/NC relay contact

User input 01

User input 02

GND

NC

User input 03

User input 04

NC

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

143

21

MODULAR IDU PLUS USER CONNECTIONS

21.1

CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU PLUS


VERSION

User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules.

IDU with LIM 32x2 Mbit/s or 53x2 Mbit/s (see Fig.90 and Fig.91)
-

Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.35, Tab.36

LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard.

USER IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.38

Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.37

50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU

48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery.

V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.42

V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.41

RS232 optional management interface. Connector details in Tab.38

2 Mbit/s wayside: optional 2 Mbit/s service channel. Connector details in Tab.43

Besides the previous ones, only for the Nodal version (see Fig.92):
-

STM-1 in/out: electric interface with female connector 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm; plug-in module with
electric interface, connector 1.0/2.3; plug-in module with optical interface, LC connector

NBUS: connect to other Nodal IDU Plus only with cable of Siae code F03471

2 Mbit/s in/out: input, 2 MHz signal output with connector 1.0/2.3 at 75 Ohm.

IDU with LIM 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT (see Fig.93)


As previous connectors but:
-

10/100BaseT Ethernet connector: RJ45 connector.

Trib: 17-24
Q3/2

Q3/1
A

LCT

RS232

Trib: 25-32

IDU ODU
R
REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

Trib: 9-16

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.90 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 32x2 Mbit/s)

USER IN/OUT

IDU ODU

WAY
SIDE

R
REM

TEST

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Q3/1
A

RS232

Q3/2

LCT

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 17-24

Trib: 25-32

FAIL
Trib: 33-40

Trib: 41-48

Trib: 49-53

Fig.91 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)

144

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

IDU ODU
R
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

WAY
SIDE

REM TEST

Q3/1

USER IN/OUT

RS232

Q3/2

LCT

FAIL

NBUS

ON

ON
FAIL

2MHz

Trib: 1-8

STM1

Trib: 9-16

FAIL

Fig.92 - Nodal IDU Plus 2 units - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1, 4+0 version

10-100 BaseT

DPX

48V

Q3/2

Q3/1
A

LCT

RS232

USER IN/OUT

1
IDUODU
R
REM TEST

LINK ACT

Trib: 17-24

FAIL
Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.93 - Modular IDU Plus - 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT


Tab.35 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Pin

75 Ohm

48

Ground A

23

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

50

Ground A

25

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

47

Ground A

22

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

45

Ground A

20

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

42

Ground A

17

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

43

Ground A

18

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

40

Ground A

15

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

39

Ground A

14

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

36

Ground B

11

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

37

Ground B

12

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

34

Ground B

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

33

Ground B

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

29

Ground B

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

145

31

Ground B

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

28

Ground B

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

26

Ground B

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.
25

.........................

.........................

50

26

Fig.94 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

146

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.36 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Pin

120 Ohm

49

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

23

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

44

Ground A

24

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

25

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

44

Ground A

21

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

22

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

44

Ground A

46

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

20

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

44

Ground A

16

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

17

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

44

Ground A

19

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

18

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

44

Ground A

41

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

15

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

44

Ground A

13

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

14

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

44

Ground A

10

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

11

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

32

Ground B

38

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

12

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

32

Ground B

35

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

32

Ground B

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

32

Ground B

147

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

32

Ground B

30

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

32

Ground B

27

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

32

Ground B

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

32

Ground B

Tab.37 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
(RJ45)
Pin

Description

Tx+

Tx-

Rx+

--

--

Rx-

--

--

Tab.38 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (SUBD 9 pin male)

148

Pin

Description

DCD (IN)

RD (IN)

TD (OUT)

DTR (OUT)

GND

Not connected

RTS (OUT)

CTS (IN)

Not connected

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.39 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description

CKTx (OUT)

TD (IN)

DTR (IN)

DSR (OUT)

GND

RD9600 (OUT)

CKRx (OUT)

DCD (OUT)

Tab.40 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description

--

TxD (IN)

DTR (IN)

DSR

GND

RxD (OUT)

--

DCD (OUT)

Tab.41 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Pin

Description

--

TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (IN)

TD (2 ch 4800) (IN)

--

GND

RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (OUT)

--

RD (2 ch 4800) (OUT)

149

Tab.42 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description

D-V11-Tx

D+V11-Tx

C-V11-Tx

C+V11-Tx

D-V11-Rx

D+V11-Rx

C-V11-Rx

C+V11-Rx

Tab.43 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45)


Pin

Description

Tx-C (IN) common

TX-F (IN) 120 Ohm

GND

TX-F (IN) 75 Ohm

Rx-C (OUT) common

Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

GND

Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

Tab.44 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)

150

Pin

Description

C relay contact- branch 1

NA/NC relay contact - branch 1

C relay contact - branch 2

NA/NC relay contact - branch 2

User input 01

User input 02

User input 03

User input 04

Ground

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

22

IDU COMPACT PLUS USER CONNECTIONS

22.1

CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU COMPACT PLUS VERSION

User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules (see Fig.95 and
Fig.96). The connectors are the following:

Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.45, Tab.46

LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard.

USER IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.51

Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.47

50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU

48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery.

V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.50

V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.49

V11

RS232
48VDC

M 3.15A
250VAC

PS

TEST
AL
Q3/2

Q3/1

LCT

USER IN/OUT

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

Fig.95 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)

V11

Trib. 17-24

RS232

Trib. 25-32

DPX
2

3
ACT LINK

1
Q3/2

Q3/1

LCT

USER IN/OUT

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

M 3.15A 250VAC

PS
1
2

- 48VDC

2
2
48VDC

TX RX
1
2

TEST
R AL

10/100 BaseT

M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.96 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

151

Tab.45 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)


Pin

75 Ohm

48

Ground A

23

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

50

Ground A

25

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

47

Ground A

22

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

45

Ground A

20

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

42

Ground A

17

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

43

Ground A

18

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

40

Ground A

15

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

39

Ground A

14

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

36

Ground B

11

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

37

Ground B

12

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

34

Ground B

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

33

Ground B

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

29

Ground B

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

31

Ground B

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

28

Ground B

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

26

Ground B

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.

25

.........................

.........................

50

26

Fig.97 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

152

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.46 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Pin

120 Ohm

49

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

23

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

44

Ground A

24

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

25

Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

44

Ground A

21

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

22

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

44

Ground A

46

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

20

Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

44

Ground A

16

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

17

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

44

Ground A

19

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

18

Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

44

Ground A

41

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

15

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

44

Ground A

13

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

14

Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

44

Ground A

10

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

11

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

32

Ground B

38

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

12

Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

32

Ground B

35

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

32

Ground B

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

32

Ground B

153

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

32

Ground B

30

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

32

Ground B

27

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

32

Ground B

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

32

Ground B

Tab.47 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
(RJ45)
Pin

Description

Tx+

Tx-

Rx+

--

--

Rx-

--

--

Tab.48 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (RJ45)

154

Pin

Description

RTS (OUT)

Tx (OUT)

DTR (OUT)

DSR (IN)

GND

Rx (IN)

CTS (IN)

DCD (IN)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.49 - V11 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description

RTS (IN)

TxD (IN)

DTR (IN)

DSR (OUT)

GND

RxD (OUT)

CTS (OUT)

DCD (OUT)

Tab.50 - V11 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 asynchronous interface
(RJ45)
Pin

Description

--

TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (IN)

TD (2 ch 4800) (IN)

--

GND

RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (OUT)

--

RD (2 ch 4800) (OUT)

Tab.51 - V11 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45)
Pin

Description for V11

Description for
contradirectional

D-V11-Tx (IN)

D-Tx (IN)

D+V11-Tx (IN)

D+Tx (IN)

C-V11-Tx (OUT)

C+V11-Tx (OUT)

D-V11-Rx (OUT)

D-Rx (OUT)

D+V11-Rx (OUT)

D+Rx (OUT)

C-V11-Rx (OUT)

C+V11-Rx (OUT)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

155

Tab.52 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)

156

Pin

Description

C relay contact

NA/NC relay contact

User input 01

User input 02

GND

NC

User input 03

User input 04

NC

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

23

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU


WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

23.1

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version
-

antisliding strip (see Fig.98)

supporting plate plus 60114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.99)

adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.100)

Band-it fixing system (see Fig.103)

antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.101)

support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.99)

connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.101)

kit for ground connection making part of ODU

1+0 version (6 GHz only)


Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.109). The
flange is UDR70.

1+1 version
-

antisliding strip (see Fig.98)

supporting plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.99)

adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.100)

hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.102)

flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.101)

kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

1+1 version (6 GHz only)


Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.110). The
flange is UDR70.

1+0/1+1 4 GHz version is fully described in chapter 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4
GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)

Warning: in order to avoid damages to flexible waveguides, dont fold or twist them more than values
specified as limit in installation instructions of the waveguide supplier.
In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.55 shows the maximum bending radius.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

157

23.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13mm torque wrench

N.1 15 mm torque wrench

N.1 17 mm torque wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

23.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:


2

Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the support plate by Band-it

Version 1+1: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

ODU grounding

1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate


Fig.98 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.99 Adhere the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.99). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
Warning: As shown in Fig.100 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional plate to enlarge the standard supporting plate dimension and relevant Ubolt for 219 mm pole fixing.
Fig.101 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.101 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.101) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.102 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.102 shows the possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

158

In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate by Band-it
In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a Band-it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.103) on
the supporting plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole. Band characteristics are:

thickness

0.76 mm

width

19 mm.

It is also possible to use the anti-sliding system (optional).

1+1 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate


Fig.98 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.99 Position the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.99). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
Fig.104 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.
Fig.104 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws


Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.107. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

Installation of the ODU


1

Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE
4 to the Oring of Fig.106.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.

Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.

Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.106) to antenna side flange (see Fig.101 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.104 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.105 depending on the polarisation.

With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.101 1+0 version or Fig.104 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail
Fig.106)

When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops.

Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.101 1+0 version or Fig.104
1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.107. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

159

23.4

GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.108.


Tab.55 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius
without rebending
mm (inch)
E-plane a

Bending radius
without rebending
mm (inch)
H-plane b

Bending radius
with rebending
mm (inch)
E-plane a.

Bending radius
with rebending
mm (inch)
H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
low

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

300 (11,9)

600 (23,7)

7 GHz high

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

250 (9,9)

600 (23,7)

11 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

13 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

a.

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

160

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Plastic blocks

Antisliding strip

Fig.98 - Antisliding strip

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

161

Use 17 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Supporting plate
Use 15 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Fig.99 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing

162

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.100 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

163

In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast


lockinh mechanism

Dente di riferimento
Reference tooth

1
1

Position of antenna
side flange

13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
Fig.101 - Mounting position

164

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

Fig.102 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

165

Fig.103 - Band-it pole mounting kit

166

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast


locking mechanism

Reference tooth

Reference tooth

Optional vawe
guide
1

RT1

RT2

Fig.104 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

167

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.105 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.

168

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU side flange

AL version

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.106 - ODU body reference tooth

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

169

AL version
Suncover (optional)

AS version

Fig.107 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

170

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1
2
3
4
5

AL version

AS version

Fig.108 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

171

Spring

Washer
Screw M5x25
UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.109 - Kit V32409

172

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring
Washer
O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.110 - Kit V32415

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

173

24

INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU


WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

24.1

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version
-

wall supporting plate with additional contact surface extension plates (see Fig.111)

antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.112)

support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.112)

connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.112)

kit for ground connection making part of ODU

1+0 version (6 GHz only)


Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.119). The
flange is UDR70.

1+1 version
-

supporting plate with additional contact surface extension tools (see Fig.111)

hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.114)

connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.112)

kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

1+1 version (6 GHz only)


Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.120). The
flange is UDR70.

1+0/1+1 4 GHz version is fully described in chapter 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4
GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.58 shows the maximum bending radius.

24.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13mm torque wrench

N.1 15 mm torque wrench

N.1 17 mm torque wrench

N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

174

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

24.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

ODU grounding.

1+0 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate


Fig.111 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.111 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Fig.112 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.56 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.112 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.112) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.113 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.113 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

1+1 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate


Fig.111 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.111 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Fig.114 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.
Fig.114 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.57 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.117 This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

175

Installation of the ODU


1

Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE
4 to the Oring of Fig.116.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.

Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.

Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.116) to antenna side flange (see Fig.112 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.114 1+1 version).

Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.115 depending on the polarisation.
4

With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.112 1+0 version or Fig.114 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail
Fig.116)

When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops.

Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.112 1+0 version or Fig.114
1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.

Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.117. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

176

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

24.4

GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.118.


Tab.58 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius
without rebending
mm (inch)
E-plane a

Bending radius
without rebending
mm (inch)
H-plane b

Bending radius
with rebending
mm (inch)
E-plane a.

Bending radius
with rebending
mm (inch)
H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
low

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

300 (11,9)

600 (23,7)

7 GHz high

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

250 (9,9)

600 (23,7)

11 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

13 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

a.

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

177

Extension plate

Supporting plate

M8 bolt and nut

Another possible fixation

Fig.111 - Wall supporting plate

178

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast


locking mechanism

Reference tooth
Reference tooth

1
1
13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

Position of antenna
side flange

Fig.112 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

179

Fig.113 - Mounting possible positions

180

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast


locking mechanism

Reference tooth

Reference tooth

Optional wave
guide

RT1

RT2

Fig.114 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

181

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.115 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.

182

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

AL version

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.116 - ODU body reference tooth

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

183

Suncover (optional)

AL version

AS version

Fig.117 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

184

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1
2
3
4
5

AL version

AS version

Bolt

Spring washer

Flat washer

Earth cable collar

Flat washer
Fig.118 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

185

Spring

Washer
Screw M5x25

UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.119 - Kit V32409

186

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring
Washer
O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.120 - Kit V32415

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

187

25

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU


WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

25.1

FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.

25.2

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version

60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of:


-

centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.121)

antislide strip (see Fig.122)

pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.123)

ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

188

pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of:


-

centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.121)

antislide strip (see Fig.122)

pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.123)

hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.132)

polarization twist disk (see Fig.134)

2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

25.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13 mm torque wrench

N.1 15 mm torque wrench

N.1 17 mm torque wrench

N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

25.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:

1+0 version
1

installation onto the pole of the support system

installation of the antenna

installation of ODU

antenna aiming

ODU grounding

1+1 version
1

installation onto the pole of the support system

installation of the antenna

installation of hybrid circuit

installation of the two ODUs

antenna aiming

ODU grounding.

25.4.1

Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna

Fig.121 Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five threaded holes around antenna flange. Mount centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated
bolts.
Caution: centring ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out.
Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes
stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal
polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx.
Fig.122 Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.122 following antenna aiming direction.
Tighten the strip with screwdriver.
Fig.123 Mount pole supporting system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direction as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the centre of supporting plate. Supporting system
should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.124. Position the antenna in such a way that

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

189

bolt in position A or D of Fig.121 cross through hole E of Fig.125. Secure the support system to the pole
by means of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts.
Fig.126 Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three support
holes. Secure the antenna to the support by thightening the relevant passing through bolts.

25.4.2

Installation of ODU

1+0 version
1

Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring (4) of Fig.129 by protecting finger hands
with gloves.

Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle
can assume position of Fig.127 depending on the polarization.

Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.128). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.128) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.129).

When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops.
Fig.130 and Fig.131 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively.

Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.128.

1+1 version
Fig.132 Apply silicon grease, type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to Orings (1). Insert Orings (1) and (6) into
twist polarization disk (2).
Vertical polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark.
Horizontal polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark.
In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.133.
Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker
(4) plane should be in contact to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively screws (7)
with the same number of spring washers (8) with the following torque:
Tab.59 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.134 Fix hybrid to support system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels
of Fig.134. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).

190

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

25.4.3

ODU installation

The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same.


1

Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring (4) of the Fig.129 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.

Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the
ODU can assune position of Fig.127 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position
is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization).

Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.128). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.128) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.129).

When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops.
Fig.130 and Fig.131 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively for 1+0 version.
Fig.135 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version.

Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.128.

25.5

ANTENNA AIMING

Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform
the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:
-

Horizontal

15 operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.136, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.137.

vertical

15 operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.136


only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and (4) and (5) of
Fig.136.
For adjustment from 0 to +30 extract nut (1) Fig.137 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.137 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.137 and (4) of Fig.136.
For adjustment from 0 to 30 extract nut (1) of Fig.137 and position it in
hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.137 and position it in hole (5). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.137 and (4) of Fig.136.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10, are available on support.
The bigger marker gives 0 starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming
position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and
(4) and (5) of Fig.136 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9),
(10) of Fig.137 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and
32 Nm torque.

25.6

COMPATIBILITY

The pole installation kit of the ODU unit in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is compatible with integrated antenna
complying with SIAE standard with measures 0.2 m, 0.4 m, 0.6 m, 0.8 m of diameter.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

191

25.7

GROUNDING

See Fig.138.
On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown.

192

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Vertical polarization

horizontal polarization

3 mm allen key
2,5 Nm torque

2
3

A
C

Antenna

Calibrated Allen screw

Centring ring
Fig.121 - Centring ring position

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

193

Steel belt

Plastic blocks
Fig.122 - Antislide strip

194

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

2
Antenna aiming direction

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

1
3

3
1

Pole fixing brackets

Tooth

Bolt

Pole support system


Fig.123 - Support mount on pole

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

195

Antenna aiming direction

Tooth
Fig.124 - Supporting system position

Fig.125 - Hole E

196

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

D
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

A, B, C, D Bolt slots
Fig.126 - Antenna installation on pole support

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.127 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

197

13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

H
H

H
H
1
1
H
H

H
H

H: Reference tooth
Fig.128 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence

198

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt
Fig.129 - ODU body reference tooth

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

199

5
30

Fig.130 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization

5
30

5
30

Fig.131 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization

200

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

7
8
1
2
4

Oring

Polarization twist disk

Hybrid mechanical body

Position marker of twist disk

Reference label for twist disk

Oring

Allen screws

Spring washer
Fig.132 - Hybrid and polarization disk

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

201

Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.133 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)

202

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1
RT1
2
1
RT2
13 mm wrench
18 Nm torque
1

Bolts

Spring washer
Fig.134 - Hybrid mount on pole support

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

203

AL version

AS version

Fig.135 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version

204

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

4
5

Marker

Vertical adjustment

Horizontal adjustment

Bolt

Fixing nut

Fig.136 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

205

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

11

10
9
5

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

1., 2., 3., 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts


5., 6., 7. Vertical aiming block bolts
8., 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to 30
9., 10. Threaded hole for vertical aimimg up to +30
Fig.137 - Antenna aiming block

206

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1
2
3
4
5

AL version

AS version

Bolt

Spring washer

Flat washer

Earth cable collar

Flat washer
Fig.138 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

207

26

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU


WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307,
V32308, V32309)

26.1

FOREWORD

The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits:
-

V32307

for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz

V32308

for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz

V32309

for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz

Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.139):
-

V32307

centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz

V32308

centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz

V32309

no centring ring (and relevant screws).

26.2

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:


-

centring ring and relevant screws

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

208

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:


-

centring ring and relevant screws

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

1+0 ODU support

hybrid and relevant screws

polarization twist disk and relevant screws

2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

26.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

N.1 13 mm spanner

N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

26.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version
1

antenna polarization

installation of the centring ring on the antenna

installation of 1+0 ODU support

installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

installation of ODU

antenna aiming

ODU grounding

1+1 version
1

antenna polarization

installation of the centring ring on the antenna

installation of 1+0 ODU support

installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

installation of hybrid

installation of ODUs

antenna aiming

ODU grounding.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

209

26.5

26.5.1

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

Setting antenna polarization

Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide > vertical polarization, vertical wave guide > horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

26.5.2

Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

26.5.3

Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.139 Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

26.5.4

Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.139 Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

26.5.5

Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.140 Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4) on the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.142) and reference tooth on the ODU body.
Fig.143 When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.
Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

210

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

26.5.6

Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: 5 operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.
Vertical aiming: 20 operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.
Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

26.5.7

ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

M8 screw without washers

M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.145.

26.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph 26.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES.

26.6.1

Installation of Hybrid

Fig.146 The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL
PATE 4) on the Orings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position
marker down. Insert the Oring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.
Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.
In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.147.
Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:
Tab.60 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.148 Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

211

26.6.2

Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.


Fig.140 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.
Fig.149 When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.
Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).
WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

Four 13mm
screws
Centring ring
(not present in V32309)

Three 3mm Allen screws


(not present in V32309)

Antenna

1+0 support
Two bushes

Fig.139 - 1+0 pole mounting

212

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"
"BNC"

Ground bolt
Fig.140 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.141 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

213

3
1
2

1
5
4

4
1
5

1
2
3
1

6 mm Allen screw

Bush (diagonally placed)

17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)

Reference point for horizontal polarization

Reference point for vertical polarization


Fig.142 - 1+0 support

214

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1+0 ODU HP with handle on the right:


horizontal polarization

1+0 ODU standard with handle on the left:


vertical polarization

Fig.143 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

215

Horizontal aiming:
two 17mm block screws

Vertical aiming:
13mm block screws
Pole support

17mm nut for horizontal


adjustment of antenna

Internal 5mm Allen


screw for vertical
adjustment of antenna

Fig.144 - Antenna aiming

216

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

1
2
3
4
5

AL version

AS version

Bolt

Spring washer

Flat washer

Earth cable collar

Flat washer
Fig.145 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

217

7
8
1
2
4

Oring

Polarization twist disk

Hybrid mechanical body

Position marker of twist disk

Reference label for twist disk

Oring

Allen screws

Spring washer
Fig.146 - Hybrid and twist disk

218

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.147 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

219

Fig.148 - Hybrid installation

220

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

AL version

AS version

Fig.149 - 1+1 ODUs installation

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

221

222

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

27

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU


WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA

27.1

FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 version.

27.2

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:


-

centring ring and relevant screws

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

27.3

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:


-

centring ring and relevant screws

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

1+0 ODU support

hybrid and relevant screws

polarization twist disk and relevant screws

2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

223

N.1 13 mm spanner

N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

27.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version
1

antenna polarization

installation of the centring ring on the antenna

installation of 1+0 ODU support

installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

installation of ODU

antenna aiming

ODU grounding

1+1 version
1

antenna polarization

installation of the centring ring on the antenna

installation of 1+0 ODU support

installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

installation of hybrid

installation of ODUs

antenna aiming

ODU grounding.

27.5

27.5.1

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

Setting antenna polarization

Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide > vertical polarization, vertical wave guide > horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

224

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

27.5.2

Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

27.5.3

Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.139 Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

27.5.4

Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.139 Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

27.5.5

Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.140 Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4) on the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.142) and reference tooth on the ODU body.
Fig.143 When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.
Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

27.5.6

Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: 5 operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.
Vertical aiming: 20 operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.
Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

27.5.7

ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

225

M8 screw without washers

M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.145.

27.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph 26.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES.

27.6.1

Installation of Hybrid

Fig.146 The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL
PATE 4) on the Orings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position
marker down. Insert the Oring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.
Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.
In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.147.
Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:
Tab.61 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.148 Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

27.6.2

Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.


Fig.140 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.
Fig.149 When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.
Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).

226

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

Centering ring

Three 3 mm
Allen screws
Four 13mm screws

Antenna

1+0 support

Fig.150 - 1+0 pole mounting

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

227

Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"
"BNC"

Ground bolt
Fig.151 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.152 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

228

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

2
1

1
4
3

3
1
4

2
1

6 mm Allen screw M10

17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)

Reference point for horizontal polarization

Reference point for vertical polarization


Fig.153 - 1+0 support

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

229

1+0 ODU with handle on the left:


vertical polarization

1+0 ODU with handle on the right:


horizontal polarization

Fig.154 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

230

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Pole support
Vertical aiming
2

1
Horizontal aiming

Fig.155 - Antenna aiming

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

231

1
2
3
4
5

AL version

AS version

Bolt

Spring washer

Flat washer

Earth cable collar

Flat washer
Fig.156 - ODU grounding

232

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

7
8
1
2
4

Oring

Polarization twist disk

Hybrid mechanical body

Position marker of twist disk

Reference label for twist disk

Oring

Allen screws

Spring washer
Fig.157 - Hybrid and twist disk

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

233

Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.158 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

234

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.159 - Hybrid installation

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

235

AS version

AL version

Fig.160 - 1+1 ODUs installation

236

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

28

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHZ


ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)

28.1

INSTALLATION KIT

1+0 version

antisliding bracket

ODU pole support and relevant screws

1+0 version

antisliding bracket

ODU pole support and relevant screws

hybrid and relevant screws

hybridODU connecting cables

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.62 shows the maximum bending radius.

28.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13 mm spanner

N.1 15 mm spanner

N.1 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

28.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support

1+1 version: installation of the hybrid on the support

installation of the ODU on the support

ODU grounding and connection of the cables to the hybrid and antenna

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

237

1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support


Fig.161 Install antisliding device (1) around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the
position of the support (2) and of the relevant hooking pin (3).
Hook the support to the plastic blocks by means of the hooking pin. Insert to the four screws (4) in the
relevant holes, set the two brackets (5) and clamp them around the pole tightening the four nuts (6) (tightening torque = 32 Nm).
Cover the projecting bits of the screws using the relevant red covers (7).
The two holes (8) house the two tightening screws of the hybrid (only for 1+1 version).

1+1 version: hybrid installation on the support


Fig.162 Set the hybrid (1) on the support (2) in such a way that the connectors are downward and that
the holes on the lower side of the hybrid match with the corresponding holes (8) of the Fig.161.
Insert the two screws (3) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and tighten the hybrid to the support.

ODU installation on the support


Locate the part of the support more suitable for the installation of the ODU: both the parts can be used
(1+0 version).
Fig.162 Locate the four slots (4) on the support (2).
Fig.163 Keeping the knob of the ODU1 downward, partially screw the two screws (2) into the two upper
holes of the ODU, on N connector side.
Hook the heads of the two screws (2) of the Fig.163 into the slots (4) of the Fig.162.
Insert also the remaining screws (2) into the holes (3).
Tighten all the four screws (2) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm).
Put the suncover (5) over the ODU (1) and fix it to the knob of the ODU by means of the supplied strip.
In case of 1+1 version, repeat the whole procedure for the second ODU.

ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna


Fig.164 Tighten the grounding cable of each ODU by means of grounding bolt (1) (tightening torque =
7.3 Nm) and the relevant washer. For the connection of the RF cable follow the label on the bottom of the
hybrid: ODU1 (RT1) is that connected to RIM1 of IDU, ODU 2 (RT2) is that connected to RIM2 of IDU.

238

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Tab.62 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius
without rebending
mm (inch)
E-plane a

Bending radius
without rebending
mm (inch)
H-plane b

Bending radius
with rebending
mm (inch)
E-plane a.

Bending radius
with rebending
mm (inch)
H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
low

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

300 (11,9)

600 (23,7)

7 GHz high

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

250 (9,9)

600 (23,7)

11 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

13 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

a.

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

239

7
6

5
2
7
6
1
3
4
5
4

8
4
4
Fig.161 - Pole installation of the support

240

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.162 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

241

1
3

Fig.163 - Installation of the ODU on the support

242

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

RT2

1
RT1

Fig.164 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

243

244

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 4.
LINE-UP

29

LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP

29.1

LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP

The lineup consists of the following steps:

on site radio terminal installation (user connections and ODU installation as described in the relevant chapters)

equipment switchon

equipment configuration (through PC software)

antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level

network element configuration

check measurements.

Equipment installation is described in Section 3. INSTALLATION.

29.1.1

Equipment configuration

In order to have the link working properly, in the local and remote equipment the same parameters have
to be set:

system layout (1+0, 1+1 hot stand-by, 1+1 frequency diversity.....) (Equipment - General)

capacity (Equipment - General)

modulation (Equipment - General)

link ID (Equipment - General)

RF channel (Radio - Radio Branch)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

245

The software to run is relevant to the equipment to configure:

LCT in case of AL, ALC AL Plus

WEB LCT in case of ALC Plus.

Traffic (Baseband - Tributary)


Used tributaries must be enabled on local and on remote equipment.

Service channels (Service Channels)


Service channels setting must be the same on local and on remote equipment: different settings of not
used service channels, between local and remote equipments, cut the operation of those service channels
properly set also.

In the following chapters, all the configuration steps are explained using LCT that differs from WEB LCT in
graphical layout only.

29.1.2

Antenna alignment and received field measurement

Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level.


Proceed as follows:

connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement

adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.

The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.165.
The received field level has a tolerance of 4 dB in the full temperature range.

29.1.3

Network element configuration

A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigurated on
site following the network administrator rules.
To the purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the SCT/LCT program has been installed, to the
network interfaces.
This has to be done via serial cable or Ethernet cable.
Warning: the checks that follow require a good knowledge of the program use.
The description of each menu and relevant windows are given by the program itself as help on line.
Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu Option the connection made via serial cable.
Perform the login to the equipment by entering:
3

Equipment IP address

User ID (default: SYSTEM)

Password: (default: siaemicr)

Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path:

246

If the connection is made via serial cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

IP Address: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup>Port
Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports. Press ? for
details.

Routing Table and Default Gateway: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup>Routing table: enter the routes or default gateway if necessary. Press ? for details.
Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: manual IP/OSPF/ISIS. The relevant
routing rules must be normally given by network administrator.

Remote Element Table: select menu Tools from menu bar and then Subnetwork Configuration
Wizard. Station name and remote element table must be assigned following description of the contextual help online (?).

Agent IP Address: select menu Equipment and then Properties. Assign the address in accordance to the address of the remote element you want to reach.

29.1.4

Radio checks

It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop:

transmitted power

received power

RF frequency

BER measurement

All these checks make use of the SCT/LCT program.

Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency


-

run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

make double click on the select equipment until main RADIO PDHAL window is shown.

on top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and
frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.

BER measurement
-

Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

Make double click on the selected equipment until main RADIO PDHAL window is shown.

On the left side select BER1/2 measure.


In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.

Perform the BER measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

247

3
2,625
2,25
1,875
1,5
1,125
0,75

dBm

0
-100

-80

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

Fig.165 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal

248

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

30

LINEUP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 MBIT/S

30.1

GENERAL

This paragraph deals with lineup of LIM Ethernet module with details of SCT/LCT program related only to
Ethernet application.
Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna
alignment, the line up procedure for two different kinds of connection set up of a radio link AL, equipped
with LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s module, is hereafter described:
1

Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection Lam per port, see Fig.166

Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection with only VLANs

3 to 1 port connections, see Fig.179.

Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment.
The software to be used depends on the equipment you have to configure.

LCT for AL, ALC, AL Plus

WEB LCT for ALC Plus.

In the following chapters all configuration steps are shown using LCT. LCT and WEB LCT only differs in
graphical interface.

30.2

LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT


CONNECTION LAN PER PORT

Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic

switch

switch

Lan-1

port 1

Lan-2

port 1
AL
radio

Lan-3

Lan-1
Lan-2

AL
radio

Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s

Nx2
Mbit/s
Local

Remote

Fig.166 - Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection


The lineup of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of SCT/LCT program.
Please refer to Fig.167. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we
select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica).
Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see
Fig.168). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the Tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

249

s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the
others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12
Mbit/s full duplex.

Fig.167 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput

250

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.168 - Tributary enable


See Fig.169 for General settings for the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan1 and
Internal Port, see Fig.170.
The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see
Fig.170). Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.
For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.171 incoming traffic at Lan1 exits at Internal Port and into Fig.173 incoming traffic at Internal Port exits at lan1 port. This
connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into Vlan
Configuration Table.
If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.
Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:
1

Disable 802.1q: no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings

Fallback: if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets

Secure: no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit. For all pass configuration Disable 802.1 should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodified the outgoing packets at Lan1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or
Tagged at the incoming port.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

251

Link Loss
Forwarding
Histeresys

Output policy
for Tagged
packets: Level
2 priority, if
used, defined
for all the ports
for incoming
packets
already Tagged

Click here for Port mapping and


VLAN configuration table

Fig.169 - Switch general settings

Fig.170 - Lan1 interface settings

252

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.171 - Vlan settings for Lan1

Invoming
Untagged
packets at
Lan-1 are sent
into output part
queue following
this selection.
In this example
packets are
inserted into
queue 0

Fig.172 - Priority setting for Lan1 and Internal Port


With Priority disabled no check is done into 802.1p priority Tag. All types of packets go into Default Priority
Queue.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

253

Fig.173 - Vlan settings for Internal Port

Fig.174 - Vlan Configuration Table

30.3

LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT


CONNECTION LAN PER PORT

Settings are done to transfer only Tagged traffic within some Vlans.
We want that Vlan 701, 702, 710 and 1, 2, 3 can pass into the radio link and all the other Tagged or Untagged packets should be blocked.
254

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

The line up of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT program. Please refer to Fig.166.
First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and
modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depends on terms of licence provided by Siae
Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements.
Inside LCT, select tributary window (see Fig.167). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary
window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required
2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet
traffic. for instance with a 16 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to ethernet circuits is automatically set to 162x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex.
See Fig.168 for general settings for the switch. All the used ports must be enabled, so enable Lan1 and
Internal Port, see Fig.169. The other port should be disabled. The correct Cable crossover arrangement
must be selected too. Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.
Vlan settings for Lan1 and Internal Port should be like in Fig.175 with Ingress Filtering Check as Secure
and Engress Mode as Tagged. With this setting only Tagged packets with Vlan ID listed into the Vlan Configuration Table can transit. All Untagged packets are blocked at the incoming port and outgoing Tagged
packets dont change.
A packet with Vlan ID XX can enter into the switch only if Incoming Port (Ingress port) is a member of the
Vlan XX, same packet will exit only from ports (Engress Port) which are members of Vlan XX. Vlan membership is described into Vlan Configuration Table. A port can be member of no one, one or more Vlans.
See Fig.176 for Vlan Configuration Table settings for our example.

Fig.175 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan1 port

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

255

Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans


Tagged incoming packet can be treated with FIFO policy or on the basis of their 802.1p priority tag and
ToS/DSCP value for IP packets. There are 4 queue at each output port. The decision about to which output
queue to send a packet is defined into Ethernet switch window selections for 802.1p tag. Into Ethernet
switch window it is possible to select ToS/DSCP button to open window ToS/DSCP, in this window each
incoming ToS/DSCP value is associated with an output queue so it is possible to change the priority of the
incoming packet.
When no info on priority is available, the packet is sent to Default Priority Queue using FIFO policy.
Into Lan1 window select Priority (802.1q), into priority box there are some selections: with Disable
switch doesnt look at priority tag; with 802.1p switch looks at Tag 802.1p only; with IpToS for IP packets only switch looks to ToS/DSCP identifier (into IP frame) only; with 802.1p IpToS switch looks first
to 802.1p tag and secondly to ToS/DSCP, see Fig.178; with IpToS802.1p switch looks first to ToS/DSCP
and secondly to Tag 802.1p.
Note: with IpToS switch looks to IP packet and ToS/DSCP doesnt matter if the packets are tagged with
802.1p or not.
In this example incoming tagged are tagged and it is necessary to transfer the packets with no change so
they must exit from output ports tagged, see Fig.176 and Fig.177.

Fig.177 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged

256

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Incoming
Untagged
packets at
Lan-1 are sent
into output part
queue following
this selection.
In this example
packets are
inserted into
queue 0.

Fig.178 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management

30.4

3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS

switch

switch
port 1

Lan-1

port 1
AL
radio

Lan-2

Lan-1
Lan-2

AL
radio

Lan-3

Lan-3

Nx2
Mbit/s

Nx2
Mbit/s
Remote

Local
Fig.179 - 3 to 1 port connections

In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.
Lan1 to Lan1 connection should transfer tagged packets with Vlan 1, 701, 760 and untagged packets.
Unspecified tagged packets must be stopped. Lan2 and Lan3 have the same requirements. For all connections IP packets with high priority TOS should transferred at minimum delay.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

257

30.5

3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC

The lineup of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT. Please refer to Fig.166.
First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and
modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of licence provided by Siae
Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements.
Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see Fig.167).
If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/
output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others
2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if
we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full
duplex.
Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan1, Lan2, Lan3 to Port1. All the
used ports must be Enabled.
Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and
a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port. See Fig.168, Fig.169, Fig.178, Fig.179,
Fig.180.
Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID in order to maintain the traffic
coming from different separated LANs, Lan1 with default VID 3301, Lan2 with default VID 3302, Lan3
with default VID 3303, for Lan1 see Fig.180, Fig.181 and Fig.183.
The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.

Fig.180 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan1 port

258

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.181 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301

Vlan 3301, 3302, 3303 are allowed to exit at Port1


with tags (Tagged). Different default Tags allow to
keep separate the traffic from Lan1, Lan2 and
Lan3 exiting at Port 1. At the remote end the traffic
is split and forwarded from Port1 to Lan1, Lan 2
and Lan3 without Tag to preserve the original
format.

Default VID assigned by


user to each port

Fig.182 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration


With the above settings inside the VLAN configuration Table only Untagged traffic is forwarded accross the
bridge.
The same settings should be done inside the remote equipment. The above example shows the Virtual Lan
Configuration Table in case of a link carrying the traffic of 3 independent LANs connected to Lan1, Lan
2, Lan3, which is split at the remote end among the outgoing Lan1, Lan2, Lan3 ports, while using a
common radio link.
To prioritize some IP packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Ethernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue, see
Fig.183.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

259

TOS value description

DSCP value description


Packets
with AF43
priority
level will
go into
Queue 3 at
all ports

AF43 now goes to Queue 3, with this


button AF43 will go to Queue 2

Fig.183 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority

30.6

3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC

If we want VLAN with Tag 701, 702 and 703 to transit between Lan1 and Port1 it is necessary to define
Port 1 and Lan 1 as members of VLAN1, 701, 760 (see Fig.184 for VLAN 701 and do the same for VLAN1,
760).
The VLAN Configuration Table will look like Fig.185.
For Lan2 and Lan3 we cannot use the same Vlan if we want to maintain traffic from Lan 1, 2, 3 separated.
We must change the number of incoming Vlan for instance of 1, 701, 760 use 2001, 2701, 2760 for Lan
2 and 3001, 3701, 3760 for Lan3. Connected equipment to Lan2 port should be reprogrammed to use
Vlan 2001, 2701, 2760.
Connected equipment to Lan3 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 3001, 3701, 3760.
To prioritize Ip packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Ethernet
switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue 3, see
Fig.181. The same should be done inside the remote equipment.

260

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.184 - Output properties of VLAN 701

Fig.185 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan

30.7

3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT

Example 1: To assign to Lan1 and Lan3 low priority and to Lan2 high priority, while wanting Tagged
and Untagged to be treated in a fair manner on each queue do as follow: select Priority Disable for Lan1,
Lan2 and Lan3; select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 0 for lan1 and Lan3 (see Fig.172). Select
Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 3 for Lan2 (as in Fig.186).
Outgoing Untagged packets will take priority tag defined into input port, in this case 0. Tagged frames keep
their tag.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

261

Example 2: Wanting tagged frames to be treated according their actual priority and untagged packets with
low priority, all inputs should be configured as in Fig.187.
Layer 2 Priority assignment is not modified if inside the second folder of the LanX (1, 2, 3) configuration
window Untagged Frame Egress Mode = Unmodified is selected as in Fig.188.

Untagged packet arriving to Lan-2 are sent to output port Queues setting of this
folder. In this example all incoming packets at LAN-2 are inserted into output
Queue 3 of output ports.
Input priority: when Disable is not selected, Tagged frame are sent to queue
0,1,2,3 to port destination priority value; when Disabled is selected for this port
switch uses the Default Priority Queue for Tagged and Untagged frames, and
without really changing Tag into Incoming Tagged frames.

Fig.186 - Queue selection

262

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.187 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag

Fig.188 - Incoming packets at Lan1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming status.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

263

31

LINEUP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER


WITH DROP/INSERT

31.1

GENERAL

This paragraph deals with lineup of LIM for east/west repeater with details of SCT/LCT program related
only to cross connection facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix.
Assuming that the radio link is already in service, the following items are described:

baseband configuration

east or west configuration

east or west presetting

tributary enabling

one direction tributary connection

protected tributary connection (drop/insert)

protection setting (Rx tributary switch).

pass through E1 connection

The 2 Mbit/s streams connected to front panel of cross connection unit are called Tributaries while the 2
Mbit/s streams connected to matrix east side or west side are called E1.

31.2

BASEBAND CONFIGURATION

Operations4 to enable the facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix are the following:

264

inside LCT, open Equipment General window as in Fig.189.

in Baseband Configuration field, select EW 16x2.

Each command has to be applied and confirmed (push Apply button and Confirm button)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.189 - Baseband configuration

31.3

EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION

Operations to configure the radio link toward one direction are the following:

inside LCT, open Equipment General East (or West) window as in Fig.190

select proper parameters in Capacity&Modulation Scheme field and right Link ID in Local Link ID
field (0 means not used).

Configuration of one direction can be different respect the other: if different capacities are selected,
number of passthrough connection depend on this.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

265

Fig.190 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction

31.4

EAST OR WEST PRESETTING

In case of bad quality of Rx signal from one direction, HBER on east or west branch, some features can be
enabled: inside LCT as in Fig.191, open Equipment, open Gen. Preset East (or West) and:

266

in order to insert AIS in case of HBER: select Enable in Hber > Rx Ais Ins Rx Sw field

in order to insert AIS in case of hardware failure in Rx: select Enable in Ais Rx Insertion field

in order to cut the signal of service channels in case of HBER: select Enable in Service Squelch field

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.191 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction

31.5

TRIBUTARY ENABLING

In order to enable/disable the tributaries connected to the crossconnection unit, inside LCT as in Fig.192,
open Base Band, open Tributary and click on central square of each tributary:

central line open: the tributary is disabled

central line closed: the tributary is enabled.

If the rectangle with a little black triangle is clicked, four alarms relevant the tributary appear: AIS, BER
(BER = 106), OOF (Out Of Frame), OOMF (Out of MultiFrame).

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

267

Fig.192 - Tributary enabling window

31.6

ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION

The procedure to enable one tributary connection towards one direction is the following: inside LCT as in
Fig.193 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the slot of the tributary on the
slot relevant the desired E1.

Fig.193 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s

268

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

31.7

PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION

A protected tributary connection is a tributary connection towards both direction where one direction is a
protection for the other (a sort of Drop/Insert in a PDH ring).
Procedure: inside LCT as in Fig.194 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the
slot relevant the tributary z on the slot relevant the desired E1 x first in one direction and after for the
other on the slot relevant the desired E1 y. Position of involved E1 can be different (for example: x y
z).

Fig.194 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and
West configured as 16x2 Mbit/s

31.8

PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH)

In a protected tributary connection one direction can be the preferential in Rx E1 switch or can be selected
manually. Protection policy setting: inside LCT as in Fig.195, open Cross Connection, select Configuration and double click the tributary slot whose protection policy we want to set.
Preferential switch:

Auto One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without
alarms

E1 East E1 east is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms

E1 West E1 west is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms

Forced switch:

Auto One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without
alarms

E1 East E1 east is selected

E1 West E1 west is selected.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

269

Fig.195 - Protection policy of a tributary stream

31.9

PASSTHROUGH E1 CONNECTION

A passthrough E1 connection is a connection between one East E1 stream and one West E1 stream.
How to set a Passthrough E1 connection: inside LCT as in Fig.196, open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the slot relevant the East E1 on the slot relevant the West E1. East and West
E1 can be different.

Fig.196 - East/West Passthrough connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2
Mbit/s

270

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

32

LINE-UP OF THE LINK WITH NODAL IDU

32.1

OVERVIEW

The following paragraph deals with the activation of the NODAL IDU unit with details of the SCT/LCT program relevant to the functionalities offered by the cross-connection matrix in relation to the achievable
connections.
Supposing that the radio links are already commissioned, the following items are described:

Tributaries on line side and tributaries on radio side

Tributaries on line side and other tributaries on line side (protected and unprotected buses included)

Tributaries on radio side and other tributaries on radio side

32.2

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

The operations to enable the functionalities offered by the internal cross-connection matrix are the following:
1

run the software LCT, open Equipment, Configurator as in Fig.197

configure the IDU as 2U, Drop Insert, Matrix (with relevant tributaries)

configure the radio links: Radio A (1A and 2A, with 2x(1+0)) and Radio B (1B and 2B, with 2x(1+0))

configure the LIM: Processor

define the IDU you are configuring: No Nodal (single nodal IDU), Node A, Node B, Node C

configure the node type: 2 Elems, 3 Elems

configure the type of BUS connecting the IDUs: No Protec. (NBUS 1 and 2 -> transport of 126 E1
each), Protec. (single NBUS-> transport of 126 E1)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

271

Fig.197 - Configurator

32.3

TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION

The operations to enable the tributaries involved in the cross-connections with the matrix are:

run the software LCT, open BaseBand, Tributaries and select the type of used tributary

enable the E1 and/or STM-1 tributaries (transport of 63 E1 each) involved by the cross-connection.
To route an E1 stream to remote equipment, a Tributary - Radio cross-connection must be created,
the enabling of the stream itself is not sufficient.

in case of STM-1 streams, configure the parameters VC4 and VC12 and the synchronization parameters (LCT, Synchronisation)

32.4

Configuration of the Cross-connection matrix

The operations to configure a cross-connection are:

run the software LCT, open Cross Connection, Matrix and press Configuration

select the type of cross-connection:


-

272

Tributary - Radio : Cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of the
Matrix module (E1, STM-1, NBUS or NBUS1 and 2) and the tributaries available on the radio
Link, 1A, 2A, 1B or 2B (it depends on the capacity set on the radio Link)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

32.4.1

Tributary - Tributary : Cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of
the Matrix module (E1, STM-1, NBUS or NBUS1 and 2)

Tributary - Radio Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

select the type of tributary to use on the front side of the Matrix module: the relevant E1 streams
will be displayed in the window together with the number of E1 streams relevant to the radio Link

select which radio Link you wish to use in the cross-connection (up to four available)

move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector of the Matrix module) by dragging and dropping from a type of tributary to the position to use
in the radio frame, see Fig.198.

the first create cross-connection is the main (colour blue); a second one regarding the same E1 tributary can be created to the radio Link B with the same modality. The second cross-connection will
be the reserve (colour pink) of the first one. The parameters, and the possible alarms, ruling the
switch between the two radio directions can be configured in the window which can be opened by
a double click on the box relevant to the E1 tributary on matrix side, see Fig.199

the tributaries in the radio frame (Link direction A or others) can be involved in a tributary loop
towards the corresponding remote radio by means of a double click on the relevant box that points
out the position in the frame, see Fig.200

the tributaries on radio side can transit directly from a radio link to the other without need to pass
from the tributaries on matrix side: by means of drag'n'drop, a box relevant to an E1 on radio side
is moved from a Link to the other Link. The two involved Links must be selected in the fields 1st
Radio and 2nd Radio. A pass-through (transit) cross-connection is so executed: see Fig.201

to delete a cross-connection, move it to the trash

to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

Fig.198 - Radio/Tributary

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

273

Fig.199 - Switch parameters of the cross-connections

Fig.200 - Tributary loop on radio side

274

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.201 - Radio/radio cross-connection

32.4.2

Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:


1

select the two types of tributary (1st Tributary and 2nd Tributary) on the front side of the Matrix
module to use as ends: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the top and bottom part of the
window

move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector on the Matrix module) by means of the drag'n'drop from a tributary type to another, see Fig.202.

to delete a cross-connection, move to the trash

to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

This type of cross-connection includes even those relevant to the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU
to another one belonging to the same node.
Remember that, in case of protected NBUS connections, there is not distinction between NBUS1 and 2,
while the single generic NBUS connection will be displayed.
The configuration of the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU to another one belonging to the same
node must be executed on both the involved nodal IDUs.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

275

Fig.202 - Tributary/Tributary Cross-connection

276

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

33

HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE CONNECTION

33.1

PROCEDURE

Set new addresses on remote equipment

Clear the Stored Routing Table on remote equipment and add new lines to it

Set the new Agent and restart remote equipment

Configure Local equipment

Prepare Subnetwork on local equipment, capture the remote equipment and send it the new subnetork

Select the remote equipment


Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Port Configuration

Fig.203 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

277

Configuration
Configure:
IP Ethernet ->Ip address and netmask (see Fig.204)
Lct PPP -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.205)
PPP Radio -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.206)
If you have other port to configure ex. PPP RS232 - 2Mbit/s EOC ecc. configure it with IP and netmask

Fig.204 - IP Ethernet

278

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.205 - LCT PPP

Fig.206 - PPP Radio


At the end select Set Values -> Confirm and Store -> Confirm.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

279

Select the equipment


Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Stored Routing Table

Fig.207 - Store Routing Table


In this menu delete all lines and default gateway, push Apply and then Save.

280

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.208 - Stored Routing Table


Add new routine lines (relevant the new addresses configuration) pushing the Add button.
When the Stored Routing Table is complete, push Apply and then Save.

Select the remote equipment


Select menu Equipment -> Properties. Set new Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).
Push Restart and then Confirm.
After the restart, the Remote Equipment disappears from SCT display.

Configure the local equipment


Configure the local equipment with the same procedure seen before. Then restart the local equipment.

Subnetwork Configuration Wizard


To see both local and remote equipments the new subnetwork (station and equipments) must be prepared.
Select menu Tools -> Subnetwork Configuration Wizard.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

281

Fig.209 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

282

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.210 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration

Push Add Station, write its name and push OK.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

283

Fig.211 - Add new station

Select this new station and push Add Element.


The Ip Address to set is the Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).

284

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.212 - Add New Network Element

After having set the Equipment Address, push OK.


The new element is created inside the previously created station
This step must be done for local and remote equipment.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

285

Fig.213 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard


Select the local equipment (the one with System (Local) )

286

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.214 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

Send the configuration to local equipment.


When the remote equipment appears in Actual Configuration, prepare again the network configuration you
have set before (or select the local equipment, push Retrieve) and send the configuration to remote equipment.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

287

288

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 5.
MAINTENANCE

34

PERIODICAL CHECKS

34.1

GENERAL

Periodical checks are used to check correct operation of the radio equipment without the presence of any
alarm condition.
The SCT/LCT programs running on the PC are used for the purpose.

34.2

CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT

The following checks must be carried out:

check of the transmitted power;

check of the received field strength (the reading must match the value resulting from hop calculations);

check of the bit error ratio and the hop performances.

For checking procedures, please refer to SCT/LCT program and relevant helpon line.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

289

35

TROUBLESHOOTING

35.1

GENERAL

The AL equipment consists of the following replaceable parts:

LIM

RIM

CONTROLLER

ODU.

Purpose of the troubleshooting is to pinpoint the faulty part and replace it with spare.
Warning: the replacement of the faulty CONTROLLER module with spare causes the spare CONTROLLER
to be reprogrammed. To the purpose refer to chapter 26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) and 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF
THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323) for the relevant procedure.

35.2

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

Troubleshooting starts as soon as one of the following alarm condition: IDU/ODU/REM is switched ON on
the IDU panel from (see Fig.215) or alarm messages are displayed by managers SCT/LCT.
Two methods are used to troubleshoot the cause of fault:

loop facilities

alarm message processing using the manager SCT/LCT

35.2.1

Loop facilities

The equipment is provided with different loops with the aid to locate the faulty equipment and then the
faulty module the equipment consists of.
Warning: the majority of loops causes the traffic to be lost.
The available loops are the following:

290

local tributary loops: usually used to test the cables interfacing the equipment upstreams

remote tributary loops: usually used to test the two direction link performance making use of an
unused 2 Mbit/s signal.

baseband loop: it permits to test the LIM circuits

IDU loop: it permits to test the complete IDU

RF loop: it permits to test the complete radio terminal

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

35.2.2

Alarm messages processing

When an alarm condition occurs, the equipment generates a number of alarm messages that appear on
the SCT windows ie: log history area and equipment view current alarm.
Investigation on the alarm message meaning permits to troubleshoot the faulty module.

Alarm message organisation


The alarms (traps) are organized as alarm grouping relevant to a specific functions performed by the equipment.
The alarm grouping is available only in the view current alarm submenu.
What follows is the list of the alarm grouping:

COMMON alarms which are not related to a specific part of the equipment but relevant to the link
as EOC radio link alarm or link telemetry fail. If these alarms are ON the link is lost. Investigation
must be made on a possible bad propagation or equipment failure. See the condition of the others
alarm grouping.

LIM This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:

external fault: tributary loss signal

LIM failure: i.e. multiplexer/demultiplexer failure or modulator/demodulator failure.


Warning: The modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substitution method is the only way to pingpoint the faulty module

alarm that can be propagated by RIM or ODU modules as baseband Rx alarm.


The Baseband loop permits to discover if the cause of this alarm activation is external or internal
to the LIM. If yes the module must be replaced.

RIM This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
-

external fault: demodulator fail alarm and local ODU alarm are generated when the ODU becomes faulty.

RIM failure power supply alarm along with cable short/open alarms or modulator/demodulator
alarms are activated.
Warning: the modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substitution methods is the only way to pinpoint the faulty module.

RT This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:


-

external fault: Rx power low alarm is generated given by a bad propagation or by a faulty remote
terminal.

ODU failure: PSU fail alarm or RF VCO alarm or RT IF alarm is activated. If this happens, replace
the ODU.

UNIT This grouping generates alarms when one of the units, the equipment consists of, is faulty
or does not respond to the controller polling. Replace the faulty unit.

CONTROLLER There is not an alarm message relevant to a controller module failure. An alarm
condition causes Led IDU to steady lights up.
Warning: The replacement of controller module requires the spare to be realigned (see chapter 26
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308,
V32309) or 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
(KIT V32323)).

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

2Mb/s

2Mb/s
FAIL

1 UNITA'

Trib: A-B-C-D

LCT

Trib: E-F-G-H

USER IN/OUT

RS232

Trib: I-J-K-L
IDU ODU
A
R
Q3
REM TEST

Trib: M-N-O-P
TX RX
WAY
SIDE

1
2
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Alarm area
Fig.215 - IDU front

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

291

36

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/


DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND
CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS.

36.1

SCOPE

This chapter describes the procedure to create configuration files.


Equipment configuration files must be used in case of replacing a faulty CONTROLLER module with the
spare. To the purpose it is necessary to upload, from each equipment the network consists of, equipment
configurations and save them on three configuration files.
It is advisable to do it upon the first installation. Configuration file download on the spare CONTROLLER
permits to restore previous operating condition. It is also possible to create virtual configuration without
being connected to equipment.

36.2

PROCEDURE

To configure the spare CONTROLLER the following must be uploaded/saved on the file/downloaded:

general equipment configuration

addresses and routing table

remote element table

To do it, run the SCT/LCT program (see relevant documentation available on line) until Subnetwork Craft
Terminal application window is displayed.

36.2.1

General equipment configuration

Upload and save

292

Select Open Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment
Configuration Wizard File Open Configuration Template.
The system will show Template Selection window.

Choose from Template Selection window the type of equipment and version (for instance radio PDH
AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) from which you want to make the upload.

Press OK.
The system will display the Configuration Wizard window referring to the selected type of equipment
and version (example: radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s)

Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment.
The system will display the Upload Configuration File window. The window will show the equipment
list.

Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration file from (normally the local equipment)
by activating the relevant box.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:
-

the operation status: upload in progress/complete.

errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.

At the end of the operation by pressing OK, the system displays, the uploaded equipment parameters present into the Configuration Wizard window.
7

Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File Save
Save File As.
The system will display Save This Config. File.
Type the file name into the proper box (with cfg extension) and set the path to be used to save
the file.

Press Save push button to finish.

Download
After having installed the spare LIM proceed as follows:
1

Select Open File from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu Equipment Configuration
Wizard File Open Open File.
The system will display Select a Config. File window.

Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the file
content.

Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File.

Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the
local equipment) and select Configure Equipment as Current File.

Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:

the operation status: upload in progress/completed

errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of operation are displayed.

Press OK to finish.

36.2.2

Addresses and routing table

Upload and save


1

Select Open Address Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu
Equipment Configuration Wizard File Open Open Address Configuration Template.
The system will show the mask of the Address Configuration Template.

Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment.
The system will display the Upload Configuration File window.

Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration from (normally the local equipment).

Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:
-

the operation status: upload in progress

errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.

At the end of the operation, the system displays, the equipment parameter present into the Configuration Wizard window.
5

Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File Save
Save File As

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

293

The system will display the Save This Config. File window. Into the proper boxes type the file name
(with cfg extension) and set the path to be used to save the file.
6

Press Save push button to finish.

Download
1

Select Open File command from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment Configuration
Wizard File Open Open File.
The system will display Select a Config. File window.

Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the parameters contained into the file.

Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File.

Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the
local equipment).

Press OK.
The system will display Download Type Selection window. Activate boxes IP port addresses configuration e Routing table. If OSPF facility is enabled, you can only select Standard (IP/Communication/OSPF) Settings.

Press OK.
The system will show a warning indicating the possibility to proceed the download or not.

Press OK.
The system will show the Download in progress.

At the end of the download will be shown the file content.

36.2.3

Remote Element Table

Upload and save


1

Select window Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tools.

Select equipment Local from Actual Configuration Area and then press Retrieve. In New configuration area is shown the list of remote equipment included the local.

Press Save to file. The system will show window Save remote element configuration file.

Save the file with Rel extension and then press Save to finish.

Download

294

Select Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tool.

Press Read from file and then select the desired file (with Rel extension).

Press Open push button and then the system will show the file content into the New Configuration
Area.

Select into the Actual configuration area the equipment you desire to download, the list of the remote element included the local.

Press Send to send the list.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

37

BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION


WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS

37.1

SCOPE

This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.

37.2

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD

Foreword: it is advisable to upload the configuration during the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1

Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed.

Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will be displayed.

Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).

Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window.

Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window.

Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word done showing the procedure success.

Press OK to finish.

37.3

CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD

Once the spare LIM has been installed proceed as follows:


1

Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard
window will be displayed.

Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configuration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed.

Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download Configuration
File window will be displayed.

Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word done indicates that download has been successfully.

Press OK to finish.

Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

295

296

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

38

PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

38.1

GENERAL

The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised.


The following tools are implemented to the purpose:

SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local control of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 AL radio equipment.

NMS5UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of
different SIAE equipment including AL family radio equipment.

For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help online.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

297

298

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 7.
COMPOSITION

39

COMPOSITION OF MODULAR IDU

39.1

GENERAL

The IDU is available in following versions:

1+0 unduplicated

1+0/1+1 standard (see Fig.216)

1+1 ethernet high and low capacity

1+1 full duplicated

1+1 high capacity (see Fig.217)

2+0 repeater E/W (see Fig.218).

The 1+0 version is considered the minimum replaceable part while the 1+1 standard/full duplicated consists of plugin modules as LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER that can individually be replaced.
Module part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

39.2

IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.220) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

299

Tab.63- IDU part number

39.3

Digit

Letter/number

Meaning

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical


structure

AL equipment

Indoor installation

4 to 7

0001
0002
0003
0004
0052
0054
00611
0062
0066
0153

1+1 1 unit 120 ohm BNC


1+1 1 unit 120 ohm RJ45
1+1 1 unit 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3
1+0 1 unit 120 ohm RJ45
1+1 2 unit 120 ohm BNC Full protected
1+1 2 unit 75 ohm BNC 32x2 1.0/2.3
1+1 1 unit Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 64 Mbit/s RJ45
2+0 2 unit E/W 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3
1+1 1 unit Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 100 Mbit/s RJ45
1+1 - 1 unit - 16E1 + FE

COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT

1+0/1+1 standard, Ethernet version


The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.
The P/Ns are the following:
-

LIM

D12034 option SUB_D 75 ohm


D12035 option SUBD 120 ohm
D1203602 option 1.0/2.3/75 ohm
D1208902 Ethernet 64 Mbit/s (low capacity)
D12100 Ethernet 100 Mbit/s (high capacity)
D12168 Ethernet (4FE + 16E1)

RIM

D12037
D26000 100 Mbit/s

CONTROLLER

D12031
D12032
D12033
D12095

RJ45
BNC
AUI
RJ45 (for D12168)

1+1 2 units
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

300

LIM

D1203602 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm


D12086 expansion trib. 17 to 32 75 Ohm

RIM

D12037

CONTROLLER

D12031
D12032
D12033
D12094

RJ45
BNC
AUI
coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

2+0 2 units
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
-

LIM

D12089 matrix in AL E/W 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm


D1205202 processor unit

RIM

D12037

CONTROLLER

D12094 coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)

FAIL
1

USER IN/OUT

RS232

13

14

15

16
WAY
SIDE

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

+ +

Q3
LCT

11
10
12
IDUODU TX RX
1
A
R
2
REM TEST

RIM1
RIM2
RIM1
RIM2

Fig.216 - Standard IDU GAI0003

RIM1
RIM2

FAIL
2

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

++ +

1
FAIL

Q3
LCT

RS232

IDUODU TX RX
1
R
2

REMTEST

USER IN/OUT

RIM1
RIM2

WAY
SIDE
CH1

2Mb/s

CH2

Fig.217 - IDU GAI0054

RIM1
RIM2

FAIL

RIM1
RIM2

FAIL
2

10

11

12

13

14

16

15

FAIL
IDUODU TX RX
Q3
LCT

RS232

WAY
SIDE

A
REMTEST

USER IN/OUT

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.218 - IDU GAI0062

10-100 BaseT

DPX

48V
RIM 1

1
A

IDU ODU
R

Q3
LCT

RS232

USER IN/OUT

2
TX RX
1

48V

2
REM TEST

RIM 2

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

RIM 1

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

FAIL
LINK ACT

RIM 2

Fig.219 - IDU GAI0153

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

301

Fig.220 - IDU P/N

302

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

40

COMPOSITION OF COMPACT IDU

40.1

GENERAL

The Compact IDU is offered in the following versions:

1+0

1+1.

40.2

ALC IDU PART NUMBER

The IDU is available in different versions, each of one identified by a specific part number. This P/N is shown
on a label attached on the IDU mechanical structure, top left side.
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:
Tab.64 - P/N meaning
Digit

Letter/number

Meaning

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure

AL family

4 to 7

0069
0073
0076
0078
0079
0080
0081
0084
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0090
0091

Indoor installation
16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1
16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1EOW
16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+0
16x2 - coax - 1+0
8x2 - 75 - 1+0
8x2 - 120 - 1+0
8x2 - 120 - 1+1
16x2 - 120 - 1+1
8x2 - 75 - 1+1
16x2 - 120 - 1+0
8x2 - 120 - 1+0 EOW
8x2 - 120 - 1+1 EOW
4x2 - 120 - 1+0 V28
4x2 - 120 - 1+1 V28
16x2 - CX - 1+1 Eth

This part number together with unit serial number is printed on a label, SIAE or custom, positioned on unit
cover.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

303

41

COMPOSITION OF IDU COMPACT PLUS (ALC


PLUS)

41.1

OVERVIEW

The IDU Compact Plus is available in the following versions:

1+0

1+1.

41.2

PART NUMBER OF IDU

The IDU Plus Compact is available in different versions, each one identified by a specific part number. This
P/N is reported on a plate attached to the mechanical structure of the IDU, up to the left.
The P/N is composed by seven digits with the following meaning:
Digit

Letter/number

Meaning

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical


structure

PDH family

Indoor installation

from 4 to 7

0118
0119
0120
0121
0128

16E1
16E1
32E1
32E1
32E1

1+0
1+1
1+0
1+1
1+1 + 3ETH

This part number with the serial number of the unit is printed on a plate, of SIAE or of the customer, placed
on the cover of the unit.

304

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

42

COMPOSITION OF IDU PLUS

42.1

GENERAL

The IDU Plus is available in 1RU and 2RU. Main configurations are:

terminal

drop/insert

nodal.

Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition can change without notice.

42.2

IDU PLUS PART NUMBER

Each version id identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.227), attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply information are also written.
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:
Tab.65

- IDU Plus part number

Digit

Letter/number

Description

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical


structure

AL equipment

Indoor installation

from 4 to 7

0115
0116
0123
0124
0126
0141

1RU, 32E1, 1+0 terminal


1RU, 32E1, 1+1 terminal
2RU, 53E1, 1+1 terminal
2RU, STM1, E1 nodal
2RU, 32E1, drop/insert
1RU, 24E1 + Ethernet, 1+1 terminal

42.3

COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS

The IDU Plus consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER/MATRIX modules made-up in different versions. Each
module is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

305

The P/Ns are the following:


-

LIM

D12139 53x2 processor


D12137 LIM 32E1
D12164 + Ethernet

RIM

D26001

MATRIX

D12146 Matrix node STM1 16E1

EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

D12148 Equipment controller

Subrack can be 1RU (see Fig.221) or 2RU (see Fig.222) high.


1

4
Fig.221 - IDU Plus 1RU composition

8
Fig.222 - IDU Plus 2RU composition

42.3.1

1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0115


-

position 1

LIM

D12137

position 2

RIM

D26001

position 3

Eq. controller

D12148

42.3.2

1+1 1RU 24E1 Terminal

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0141

306

position 1

LIM

D12164

position 3

RIM

D26001

position 4

RIM

D26001

position 2

Eq. controller

D12148

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

10-100 BaseT

DPX

48V

Q3/2

Q3/1

RS232

LINK ACT

WAY
SIDE

REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

IDUODU
R

A
LCT

Trib: 17-24

FAIL
Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.223 - 24E1 1+1 terminal

42.3.3

1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0116


-

position 1

LIM

D12137

position 3

RIM

D26001

position 4

RIM

D26001

position 2

Eq. controller

D12148

Trib: 17-24
Q3/2

Q3/1
A

LCT

RS232

Trib: 25-32

IDU ODU
R
REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

Trib: 9-16

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.224 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal

42.3.4

1+1 terminal 2RU 53E1

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0123


-

position 1

Eq. controller

D12148

position 2

LIM

D12137

position 3

53E1 expansion

D12151

position 5

RIM

D26001

position 6

RIM

D26001

USER IN/OUT

IDU ODU

WAY
SIDE

R
REM

TEST

CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Q3/1
A

RS232

Q3/2

LCT

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 17-24

Trib: 25-32

FAIL
Trib: 33-40

Trib: 41-48

Trib: 49-53

Fig.225 - 53E1 1+1 terminal

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

307

42.3.5

2RU 32E1 drop/insert

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0126


-

position 1

Eq. controller

D12148

position 2

53E1 processor

D12139

position 3

Matrix 32E1

D12143

position 5,6

RIM

D26001

IDU ODU
R
REM TEST

USER IN/OUT

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Q3/1
A

RS232

Q3/2

LCT

FAIL

FAIL
Trib: 1-8

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 17-24

Trib: 25-32

Fig.226 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1

42.3.6

Nodal 2RU STM1 E1

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
-

position 1

Eq. controller

D12148

position 2

53E1 processor

D12139

position 3

Matrix node STM1 16E1D12146

position 4

53E1 processor

D12139

position 5,6,7,8

RIM

D26001

Fig.227 - IDU Plus P/N

308

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

43

COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT

43.1

GENERAL

The ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 version the
connection to the antenna is performed through a passive hybrid.
Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the antenna configuration etc...
A label (see Fig.228) attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as go/return
frequency value, subband, operating band and part number.
From ODU name (e.g. AL18 or AS18) you can see the version of used ODU.
For example the P/N GA0001/001, shown by the label, identifies the following:
-

AL18

18 GHz operating band

G/R

1010 MHz go/return frequency value

SB

1L operating subband low

S/N

serial number

DATA CODE

month and year

A further label is available attached on the hybrid body as per example of Fig.229.
It shows the position of each transceiver and the type of coupler, balanced or unbalanced.
Warning: In case of unbalanced type the lowest loss is always referred to branch 1.
In Tab.66 various ODU versions and hybrid part number are listed.
Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

Tab.66 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number


RF Band in GHz

ODU

Hybrid with support

1L

1H

Balanced

Unbalanced

13

GA9018

GA9019

V32218

V32219

18

GA9000

GA9001

V32184

V32185

23

GA9006

GA9007

V32186

V32187

38

GA9014

GA9015

V32210

V32230

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

309

Fig.228 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL

310

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.229 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

311

312

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 8.
LISTS AND SERVICES

44

LIST OF FIGURES

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 14


Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 14
Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 14
Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 14
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 15
Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna ............................................ 26
Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity ........................................................ 26
Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity with 4x10/100BaseT ports ................... 26
Fig.9 - Compact IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s with 3x10/100BaseT ports ..................................... 26
Fig.10 - Modular IDU PLUS 1+0/1+1 - up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity........................................ 27
Fig.11 - Modular IDU Plus 1+1 - up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports ........... 27
Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus nodal with matrix - up to 16x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity .......... 27
Fig.13 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)................................................................ 27
Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU Modular configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors ......................... 33
Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU Modular Ethernet tributary connectors .................................................. 33
Fig.16 - 1+1 IDU Modular D type tributary connectors ..................................................... 33
Fig.17 - 1+1 Modular IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s) ..................................................................... 33
Fig.18 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors ...... 34
Fig.19 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration D type tributary connectors............... 34
Fig.20 - IDU Modular Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s....................................................................... 34
Fig.21 - IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodal 4+0 ..................................... 34
Fig.22 IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s).......................................................... 34
Fig.23 - IDU Compact 1+0 (2x2/4x2 Mbit/s) ..................................................................... 34

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

313

Fig.24 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)....................................................... 35


Fig.25 - IDU Compact 1+1 (coax. connector up to 16x2 Mbit/s) + Ethernet module ............... 35
Fig.26 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH) ................................................................. 35
Fig.27 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)............................................................................. 35
Fig.28 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting) ............................................ 35
Fig.29 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna.................................................................... 36
Fig.30 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 36
Fig.31 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 37
Fig.32 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)............................................. 38
Fig.33 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna ................................................................... 39
Fig.34 - LIM block diagram Tx side................................................................................ 53
Fig.35 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing.......................................................... 54
Fig.36 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 54
Fig.37 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 54
Fig.38 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 55
Fig.39 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing ............................................................... 56
Fig.40 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing ........................................................................ 57
Fig.41 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s ............................................................... 57
Fig.42 - LIM block diagram Rx side ............................................................................... 58
Fig.43 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 59
Fig.44 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 60
Fig.45 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 61
Fig.46 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 62
Fig.47 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 75
Fig.48 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 76
Fig.49 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 76
Fig.50 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 77
Fig.51 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram .................................................................... 78
Fig.52 - Tag control into field .......................................................................................... 79
Fig.53 - Output queues .................................................................................................. 79
Fig.54 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets .................................................................. 79
Fig.55 - ToS/DSCP......................................................................................................... 80
Fig.56 - IDU + 1RU composition ...................................................................................... 83
Fig.57 - IDU + 2RU composition ...................................................................................... 84
Fig.58 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure ........................................................ 86
Fig.59 - Nodal connections in 3 subracks .......................................................................... 88
Fig.60 - Nodal connections in 2 subracks .......................................................................... 88
Fig.61 - Nodal - 12 max radio directions, max 6xstm-1, max 48E1 all disconnecting, no blocking .
89
Fig.62 - LIM block diagram - Tx side ................................................................................ 98
Fig.63 - LIM block diagram - Rx side ................................................................................ 99
Fig.64 - RIM block diagram........................................................................................... 100
Fig.65 - Main and peripheral controller connection ........................................................... 101

314

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.66 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack .............................................................................. 101


Fig.67 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................. 102
Fig.68 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH).............................................................. 103
Fig.69 - IDU for E/W repeater ....................................................................................... 104
Fig.70 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix .............................................. 108
Fig.71 - RIM block diagram........................................................................................... 112
Fig.72 - Main and peripheral controller connection ........................................................... 113
Fig.73 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack .............................................................................. 114
Fig.74 - IDU E/W loops ................................................................................................ 115
Fig.75 - 1+0 AL ODU .................................................................................................. 121
Fig.76 - 1+1 AL ODU ................................................................................................... 121
Fig.77 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version ...................................................................... 122
Fig.78 - ODU block diagram (both versions).................................................................... 123
Fig.79 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna ............................................................................. 124
Fig.80 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas ........................................................................... 124
Fig.81 - ATPC operation ............................................................................................... 125
Fig.82 - DC/DC converter front coverplate ...................................................................... 126
Fig.83 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0 ............................................... 128
Fig.84 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1 ............................................... 129
Fig.85 - Grounding connection ...................................................................................... 134
Fig.86 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s ................................... 135
Fig.87 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT ........ 136
Fig.88 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT....... 136
Fig.89 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)..................................................... 140
Fig.90 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 32x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 144
Fig.91 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 144
Fig.92 - Nodal IDU Plus 2 units - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1, 4+0 version ................................... 145
Fig.93 - Modular IDU Plus - 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT............................................. 145
Fig.94 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 146
Fig.95 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)........................................................................... 151
Fig.96 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH) ............................................................... 151
Fig.97 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 152
Fig.98 - Antisliding strip ............................................................................................... 161
Fig.99 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing ............................................................. 162
Fig.100 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole .......................................................................... 163
Fig.101 - Mounting position .......................................................................................... 164
Fig.102 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism...................... 165
Fig.103 - Band-it pole mounting kit................................................................................ 166
Fig.104 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate................................................ 167
Fig.105 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 168
Fig.106 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 169
Fig.107 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version .................................................................. 170

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

315

Fig.108 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 171


Fig.109 - Kit V32409.................................................................................................... 172
Fig.110 - Kit V32415.................................................................................................... 173
Fig.111 - Wall supporting plate ..................................................................................... 178
Fig.112 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism ........................................................ 179
Fig.113 - Mounting possible positions ............................................................................. 180
Fig.114 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate ................................................ 181
Fig.115 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 182
Fig.116 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 183
Fig.117 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version .................................................................. 184
Fig.118 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 185
Fig.119 - Kit V32409.................................................................................................... 186
Fig.120 - Kit V32415.................................................................................................... 187
Fig.121 - Centring ring position ..................................................................................... 193
Fig.122 - Antislide strip ................................................................................................ 194
Fig.123 - Support mount on pole ................................................................................... 195
Fig.124 - Supporting system position ............................................................................. 196
Fig.125 - Hole E .......................................................................................................... 196
Fig.126 - Antenna installation on pole support................................................................. 197
Fig.127 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.................................................................... 197
Fig.128 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence ........................ 198
Fig.129 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 199
Fig.130 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................. 200
Fig.131 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization .......................................... 200
Fig.132 - Hybrid and polarization disk ............................................................................ 201
Fig.133 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)........................................... 202
Fig.134 - Hybrid mount on pole support ......................................................................... 203
Fig.135 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version........................................................ 204
Fig.136 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments.................................................................. 205
Fig.137 - Antenna aiming block ..................................................................................... 206
Fig.138 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 207
Fig.139 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 212
Fig.140 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 213
Fig.141 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 213
Fig.142 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 214
Fig.143 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 215
Fig.144 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 216
Fig.145 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 217
Fig.146 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 218
Fig.147 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 219
Fig.148 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 220

316

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.149 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 221


Fig.150 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 227
Fig.151 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 228
Fig.152 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 228
Fig.153 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 229
Fig.154 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 230
Fig.155 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 231
Fig.156 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 232
Fig.157 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 233
Fig.158 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 234
Fig.159 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 235
Fig.160 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 236
Fig.161 - Pole installation of the support......................................................................... 240
Fig.162 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version) ..................... 241
Fig.163 - Installation of the ODU on the support .............................................................. 242
Fig.164 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna ..................... 243
Fig.165 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal ....................................................... 248
Fig.166 - Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection ............................................. 249
Fig.167 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput ..................................................................... 250
Fig.168 - Tributary enable ............................................................................................ 251
Fig.169 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 252
Fig.170 - Lan1 interface settings.................................................................................. 252
Fig.171 - Vlan settings for Lan1 ................................................................................... 253
Fig.172 - Priority setting for Lan1 and Internal Port ........................................................ 253
Fig.173 - Vlan settings for Internal Port .......................................................................... 254
Fig.174 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 254
Fig.175 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan1 port ............................................ 255
Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans ......................................................... 256
Fig.177 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged ....................... 256
Fig.178 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management ......................................................... 257
Fig.179 - 3 to 1 port connections ................................................................................... 257
Fig.180 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan1 port............................................... 258
Fig.181 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301............................................................... 259
Fig.182 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration ......................................................... 259
Fig.183 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority................................... 260
Fig.184 - Output properties of VLAN 701 ........................................................................ 261
Fig.185 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan................................... 261
Fig.186 - Queue selection ............................................................................................. 262
Fig.187 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag............................ 263
Fig.188 - Incoming packets at Lan1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming
status. ........................................................................................................................ 263
Fig.189 - Baseband configuration .................................................................................. 265
Fig.190 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction .................................................... 266

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

317

Fig.191 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction ........................................................ 267


Fig.192 - Tributary enabling window .............................................................................. 268
Fig.193 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s ...
268
Fig.194 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and West
configured as 16x2 Mbit/s ............................................................................................. 269
Fig.195 - Protection policy of a tributary stream .............................................................. 270
Fig.196 - East/West Passthrough connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2 Mbit/
s ................................................................................................................................ 270
Fig.197 - Configurator.................................................................................................. 272
Fig.198 - Radio/Tributary ............................................................................................. 273
Fig.199 - Switch parameters of the cross-connections ...................................................... 274
Fig.200 - Tributary loop on radio side............................................................................. 274
Fig.201 - Radio/radio cross-connection........................................................................... 275
Fig.202 - Tributary/Tributary Cross-connection................................................................ 276
Fig.203 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup ............................................ 277
Fig.204 - IP Ethernet ................................................................................................... 278
Fig.205 - LCT PPP ........................................................................................................ 279
Fig.206 - PPP Radio ..................................................................................................... 279
Fig.207 - Store Routing Table ....................................................................................... 280
Fig.208 - Stored Routing Table...................................................................................... 281
Fig.209 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 282
Fig.210 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration ..................................... 283
Fig.211 - Add new station............................................................................................. 284
Fig.212 - Add New Network Element .............................................................................. 285
Fig.213 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 286
Fig.214 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 287
Fig.215 - IDU front ...................................................................................................... 291
Fig.216 - Standard IDU GAI0003 ................................................................................... 301
Fig.217 - IDU GAI0054 ................................................................................................ 301
Fig.218 - IDU GAI0062 ................................................................................................ 301
Fig.219 - IDU GAI0153 ................................................................................................ 301
Fig.220 - IDU P/N........................................................................................................ 302
Fig.221 - IDU Plus 1RU composition ............................................................................... 306
Fig.222 - IDU Plus 2RU composition ............................................................................... 306
Fig.223 - 24E1 1+1 terminal......................................................................................... 307
Fig.224 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal .................................................................................... 307
Fig.225 - 53E1 1+1 terminal......................................................................................... 307
Fig.226 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1 .............................................................................. 308
Fig.227 - IDU Plus P/N ................................................................................................. 308
Fig.228 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL ................................................. 310
Fig.229 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics .............. 311

318

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

45

LIST OF TABLES

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................13


Tab.2 - Ethernet traffic capacity according to the number of used E1.....................................29
Tab.3 - Transmission capacity Modular IDU Plus .................................................................30
Tab.4 - IDU consumption ...............................................................................................31
Tab.5 - Guaranteed current absorbition for power supply connector ......................................32
Tab.6 - IDU/ODU dimensions ...........................................................................................32
Tab.7 - IDU/ODU weight .................................................................................................33
Tab.8 - Optical interface characteristics .............................................................................42
Tab.9 - Aggregate frame .................................................................................................48
Tab.10 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................49
Tab.11 - Aggregate frame ...............................................................................................64
Tab.12 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................65
Tab.13 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations ..............................................................84
Tab.14 - Capacity change ................................................................................................90
Tab.15 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................93
Tab.16 - Transmission capacity of the IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet................................ 103
Tab.17 - Nominal output power (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU (1 dB tolerance) ................ 117
Tab.18 - Transmit alarm priority..................................................................................... 120
Tab.19 - Characteristics of the cables.............................................................................. 133
Tab.20 - Tributary connector pinout (Sub-D 25 pin male)................................................. 136
Tab.21 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description (RJ45) .. 137
Tab.22 - LCT connector pinout for connection to supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male) ...... 137
Tab.23 - RSR232 connector pinout for supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male).................... 137
Tab.24 - CH1 connector pinout for 9600 bit/s V.24 interface (RJ45) ................................ 138
Tab.25 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45)............ 138
Tab.26 - CH2 connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45) ...................... 138
Tab.27 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pinout (RJ45) ......................................................... 139
Tab.28 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside (SubD 9 pin male) ............................................................................................................... 139
Tab.29 - Tributary connector pinout (male 25 pin SUBD)................................................ 141
Tab.30 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) ........................ 142
Tab.31 - S.C. connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45) ...................... 142
Tab.32 - S.C. connector pinout V.28 interface (RJ45).................................................... 142
Tab.33 - Connector pinout RS232 PPP interface (Sub-D 9 pin male)............................... 143
Tab.34 - User in/out connector pinout (Sub-D 9 pin male) ............................................... 143
Tab.35 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm .............................................................................. 145
Tab.36 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)............................................... 147

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

319

Tab.37 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)
148
Tab.38 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (SUBD 9 pin male).................................... 148
Tab.39 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)................. 149
Tab.40 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) ............... 149
Tab.41 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45) ............... 149
Tab.42 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 150
Tab.43 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45).......................................................... 150
Tab.44 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)............................................... 150
Tab.45 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female) ................................................ 152
Tab.46 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)............................................... 153
Tab.47 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)
154
Tab.48 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (RJ45)..................................................... 154
Tab.49 - V11 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) ............... 155
Tab.50 - V11 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 asynchronous interface (RJ45)
155
Tab.51 - V11 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 155
Tab.52 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)............................................... 156
Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 158
Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 159
Tab.55 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 160
Tab.56 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 175
Tab.57 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 175
Tab.58 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 177
Tab.59 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 190
Tab.60 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 211
Tab.61 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 226
Tab.62 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 239
Tab.63 - IDU part number .............................................................................................. 300
Tab.64 - P/N meaning .................................................................................................. 303
Tab.65 - IDU Plus part number....................................................................................... 305
Tab.66 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number.......................................... 309

320

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

46

ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

321

322

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003